WO2019064577A1 - Substrate handling device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, device production method, substrate handling method, and exposure method - Google Patents
Substrate handling device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, device production method, substrate handling method, and exposure method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2019064577A1 WO2019064577A1 PCT/JP2017/035710 JP2017035710W WO2019064577A1 WO 2019064577 A1 WO2019064577 A1 WO 2019064577A1 JP 2017035710 W JP2017035710 W JP 2017035710W WO 2019064577 A1 WO2019064577 A1 WO 2019064577A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- substrate
- holding
- unit
- holding unit
- holder
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/20—Exposure; Apparatus therefor
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L21/00—Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
- H01L21/67—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
- H01L21/677—Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere for conveying, e.g. between different workstations
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a substrate transfer apparatus, an exposure apparatus, a method of manufacturing a flat panel display, a device manufacturing method, a substrate transfer method, and an exposure method.
- a pattern formed on a mask (or reticle) is transferred onto a substrate (substrate made of glass or plastic, semiconductor wafer etc.) using an energy beam.
- An exposure apparatus for transferring is used.
- a substrate transfer apparatus for transferring a substrate to a holding surface of a holding apparatus, a first holding unit holding the substrate above the holding apparatus, and the first holding unit holding the substrate
- a second holding unit for holding a portion of the substrate; and the holding device, the second holding unit, and the first holding unit such that the first holding unit is retracted from above the holding device.
- a driving unit configured to relatively move in a predetermined direction along the holding surface, wherein the first holding unit is a vertical direction of an area of the substrate held by the first holding unit during relative movement by the driving unit.
- a substrate transport apparatus is provided for holding the substrate such that the position of the substrate approaches the holding apparatus.
- an exposure apparatus comprising: the substrate transfer apparatus described above; and an optical system which irradiates an energy beam to the substrate transferred to the holding apparatus to expose the substrate.
- a method of manufacturing a flat panel display comprising: exposing a substrate using the exposure apparatus described above; and developing the exposed substrate.
- a device manufacturing method comprising: exposing a substrate using the exposure apparatus described above; and developing the exposed substrate.
- a substrate transfer method for transferring a substrate to a holding surface of a holding device, holding the substrate by the first holding portion and the second holding portion above the holding device; And relatively moving the holding device, the second holding portion, and the first holding portion in a predetermined direction along the holding surface such that the holding portion is retracted from above the holding device.
- the substrate on which the first holding unit holds the substrate so that the vertical position of the region of the substrate held by the first holding unit approaches the holding device during relative movement.
- a method of delivery is provided.
- an exposure method comprising: transporting the substrate to the holding device by the above substrate transporting method; and irradiating the substrate with an energy beam to expose the substrate. Is provided.
- a method of manufacturing a flat panel display comprising: exposing the substrate using the above-described exposure method; and developing the exposed substrate.
- a device manufacturing method comprising: exposing the substrate using the above-described exposure method; and developing the exposed substrate.
- FIG. 1 is a view schematically showing the arrangement of an exposure apparatus according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 2 is a plan view of a stage apparatus and a substrate transfer apparatus which the exposure apparatus (partially omitted) of FIG. 1 has.
- Fig.3 (a) is a top view of the stage apparatus which concerns on 1st Embodiment
- FIG.3 (b) is a side view
- FIG.3 (c) is AA sectional drawing of Fig.3 (a). is there.
- FIGS. 4A to 4C are side views (part 1) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the first embodiment.
- 5 (a) to 5 (c) are side views (part 2) of an exposure apparatus for describing the substrate exchanging operation in the first embodiment.
- FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (c) are side views (part 3) of an exposure apparatus for describing the substrate exchanging operation in the first embodiment.
- FIGS. 7A to 7C are side views (part 4) of the exposure apparatus for describing the substrate exchanging operation in the first embodiment.
- FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (c) are side views (part 5) of an exposure apparatus for describing the substrate exchanging operation in the first embodiment.
- FIG. 9A to FIG. 9C are side views of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the first modification of the first embodiment.
- FIG. 10 (a) is a perspective view of a substrate loading hand according to a second modification of the first embodiment
- FIG. 10 (b) is a side view.
- FIG. 11A and 11B are side views of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the third modification of the first embodiment.
- 12 (a) is a top view of a substrate loading hand according to a fourth modification of the first embodiment
- FIG. 12 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 12 (a).
- FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are views for explaining the substrate loading operation using the substrate loading hand according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment.
- FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B are cross-sectional views schematically showing a substrate loading hand according to a fifth modification of the first embodiment.
- FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B are respectively a top view and a side view of the exposure apparatus according to the second embodiment.
- FIG. 16B are perspective views of the substrate loading hand according to the second embodiment.
- 17 (a) and 17 (b) are a top view and a side view (part 1) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second embodiment, respectively.
- 18 (a) and 18 (b) are respectively a top view and a side view (part 2) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second embodiment.
- FIG. 19A and FIG. 19B are respectively a top view and a side view (part 3) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second embodiment.
- FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B are respectively a top view and a side view (part 4) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second embodiment.
- FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b) are respectively a top view and a side view (# 5) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second embodiment.
- FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b) are a top view and a side view (part 6) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second embodiment, respectively.
- FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b) are respectively a top view and a side view (# 7) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second embodiment.
- FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) are a top view and a side view (part 8) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second embodiment, respectively.
- FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b) are views for explaining the advantages of the substrate loading hand according to the second embodiment.
- FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are respectively a top view and a side view of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the first modified example of the second embodiment.
- FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are a top view and a side view (part 1) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second modified example of the second embodiment, respectively.
- FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b) are a top view and a side view (part 2) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second modified example of the second embodiment, respectively.
- FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b) are a top view and a side view (part 4) of an exposure apparatus for describing a substrate exchange operation in the second modified example of the second embodiment, respectively.
- 31 (a) and 31 (b) is a side view of a substrate transfer apparatus for describing transfer of a substrate from a beam unit to a substrate loading hand in a third modification of the second embodiment.
- 32A and 32B respectively show a top view and a side view of an exposure apparatus for describing transfer of a substrate from a beam unit to a substrate loading hand in the fourth modification of the second embodiment (parts 1).
- 33 (a) and 33 (b) are respectively a top view and a side view of an exposure apparatus for describing transfer of a substrate from a beam unit to a substrate loading hand in the fourth modification of the second embodiment 2).
- 34 (a) and 34 (b) are respectively a top view and a side view of an exposure apparatus for describing transfer of a substrate from the external transfer device to the substrate loading hand in the fifth modification of the second embodiment That is 1).
- FIG. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are respectively a top view and a side view of an exposure apparatus for describing transfer of a substrate from the external transfer device to the substrate loading hand in the fifth modification of the second embodiment That is 2).
- FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing a substrate loading hand according to a sixth modification of the second embodiment.
- FIG. 37A and FIG. 37B are diagrams for explaining a configuration example of a substrate loading hand.
- FIG. 38 is a diagram for describing a configuration example of a substrate transfer unit.
- FIG. 39 is a diagram for describing a configuration example of a surface plate.
- FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b) are respectively a top view and a side view showing the configuration of the stage apparatus in the first and second embodiments and their modifications.
- FIGS. 41 (a) is a top view showing another example of the stage device
- FIGS. 41 (b) and 41 (c) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 41 (a).
- FIG. 42 (a) is a top view showing another example of the stage device
- FIG. 42 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 42 (a).
- FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c) are side views for describing the placement of the substrate on the stage apparatus shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b).
- FIG. 1 schematically shows the arrangement of an exposure apparatus 10A according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 2 is a plan view of a stage device 20A and a substrate transfer device 100A which the exposure apparatus 10A (partially omitted) of FIG. 1 has.
- 3 (a) is a plan view of the stage device 20A
- FIG. 3 (b) is a side view of the stage device 20A
- FIG. 3 (c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 3 (a). is there.
- the exposure apparatus 10A is, for example, a projection of a step-and-scan method in which a rectangular (square) glass substrate P (hereinafter simply referred to as a substrate P) used for a liquid crystal display (flat panel display) or the like is an exposure object
- the exposure apparatus is a so-called scanner.
- the exposure apparatus 10A includes an illumination system 12, a mask stage 14 holding a mask M on which a pattern such as a circuit pattern is formed, a projection optical system 16, and a surface (a surface facing the + Z side in FIG. ), A stage apparatus 20A for holding a substrate P coated with a resist (sensitive agent), a substrate transfer apparatus 100A, and a control system of these.
- an illumination system 12 a mask stage 14 holding a mask M on which a pattern such as a circuit pattern is formed
- a projection optical system 16 and a surface (a surface facing the + Z side in FIG. )
- a stage apparatus 20A for holding a substrate P coated with a resist (sensitive agent), a substrate transfer apparatus 100A, and a control system of these.
- the X axis, Y axis and Z axis orthogonal to each other are set with respect to the exposure apparatus 10A, and the mask M and the substrate P with respect to the projection optical system 16 at the time of exposure
- the rotational (inclination) directions about the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis will be described as ⁇ x, ⁇ y, and ⁇ z directions, respectively.
- positions in the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis directions will be described as X position, Y position, and Z position, respectively.
- the illumination system 12 is configured in the same manner as the illumination system disclosed in, for example, US Pat. No. 5,729,331, and illuminates the mask M with illumination light for illumination (illumination light) IL.
- illumination light IL for example, light including at least one wavelength of i-line (wavelength 365 nm), g-line (wavelength 436 nm) and h-line (wavelength 405 nm) is used.
- the light source used in the illumination system 12 and the wavelength of the illumination light IL irradiated from the light source are not particularly limited.
- ultraviolet light such as ArF excimer laser light (wavelength 193 nm) or KrF excimer laser light (wavelength 248 nm) It may be light or vacuum ultraviolet light such as F2 laser light (wavelength 157 nm).
- the mask stage 14 holds a light transmission type mask M.
- the mask stage 14 is driven at a predetermined stroke at least in the scanning direction (X-axis direction) by a mask stage drive system (not shown) including, for example, a linear motor. Further, the mask stage 14 is driven by a fine movement drive system that moves the X position and the Y position with a stroke in order to adjust the relative position to at least one of the illumination system 12, the stage device 20 A, and the projection optical system 16.
- Position information of the mask stage 14 is obtained by, for example, a mask stage position measurement system (not shown) including a linear encoder system and an interferometer system.
- the projection optical system 16 is disposed below the mask stage 14.
- the projection optical system 16 is a so-called multi-lens type projection optical system having the same configuration as that of the projection optical system disclosed in, for example, US Pat. No. 6,552,775, and forms, for example, an erecting image. It has multiple optical systems that are both telecentric.
- the projection optical system 16 may not be a multi-lens type. It may be configured by one projection optical system as used in a semiconductor exposure apparatus.
- the exposure apparatus 10A when the mask M located in a predetermined illumination area by the illumination light IL from the illumination system 12 is illuminated, a projection image (a partial pattern image) of the pattern of the mask M in the illumination area Is formed in the exposure area by the projection optical system 16. Then, the mask M moves relative to the illumination area (illumination light IL) in the scanning direction, and the substrate P moves relative to the exposure area in the scanning direction, whereby scanning exposure is performed on the substrate P.
- the pattern formed on the mask M (the entire pattern corresponding to the scanning range of the mask M) is transferred.
- the stage device 20A includes a platen 22, a substrate table 24, a support device 26, and a substrate holder 28A.
- the surface plate 22 is formed of a rectangular plate-like member in plan view (as viewed from the + Z side) arranged such that the upper surface (+ Z surface) is parallel to the XY plane, and the floor is provided via a vibration isolation device (not shown) It is installed on F.
- the support device 26 is mounted on the surface plate 22 in a non-contact manner, and supports the substrate table 24 from the lower side in a non-contact manner.
- the substrate holder 28A is disposed on the substrate table 24, and the substrate table 24 and the substrate holder 28A are integrally driven by a stage driving system (not shown) provided in the stage device 20A.
- the stage drive system includes, for example, a linear motor, and a coarse movement system capable of driving the substrate table 24 in a predetermined stroke in the X-axis and Y-axis directions (along the upper surface of the platen 22); And a micromotion system for minutely driving the substrate table 24 in six degrees of freedom (X axis, Y axis, Z axis, .theta.x, .theta.y, and .theta.z).
- the stage device 20A includes, for example, an optical interferometer system, an encoder system, and the like, and includes a stage measurement system for obtaining positional information in the direction of the six degrees of freedom of the substrate table 24.
- substrate P is mounted in the upper surface TS (surface by the side of + Z) of the substrate holder 28A rectangular shape in planar view.
- the aspect ratio of the upper surface TS is substantially the same as that of the substrate P.
- the lengths of the long side and the short side of the upper surface TS are set somewhat shorter than the lengths of the long side and the short side of the substrate P, respectively.
- the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A is finished flat over the entire surface. Further, on the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A, a plurality of minute holes (not shown) for blowing air and a plurality of small holes (not shown) for vacuum suction are formed. Note that the minute holes for blowing air and the small holes for vacuum suction may use a common hole in combination.
- the substrate holder 28A sucks the air between the upper surface and the substrate P through the plurality of holes using the vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown), and adsorbs the substrate P on the upper surface TS. It is possible to make it (flatten).
- the substrate holder 28A is a so-called pin chuck type holder, and a plurality of pins (a pin whose diameter is very small, for example, about 1 mm in diameter) are arranged at substantially equal intervals.
- the substrate holder 28A can reduce the possibility of holding and supporting dust and foreign matter on the back surface of the substrate P, and can reduce the possibility of deformation of the substrate P due to the holding of the foreign matter.
- the substrate P is held (supported) on the top surfaces of the plurality of pins.
- the XY plane formed by the upper surfaces of the plurality of pins is taken as the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate holder 28A supplies (charges) pressurized gas (for example, air) supplied from a pressurized gas supply device (not shown) between the upper surface TS and the substrate P via the holes.
- pressurized gas for example, air
- a pressurized gas supply device not shown
- the back surface of the substrate P adsorbed to the substrate holder 28A can be separated from the top surface TS (the substrate P is floated).
- a time difference occurs in the timing of supplying pressurized gas, or a hole for performing vacuum suction and a hole for supplying pressurized gas. Control the ground state of the substrate P by changing the location appropriately or changing the air pressure appropriately by suction and air supply (for example, an air pool between the back surface of the substrate P and the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A So that it does not occur).
- the substrate holder 28A may perform surface correction of the substrate in a state where the substrate is floated and supported without attracting the substrate to the upper surface TS.
- the substrate holder 28A supplies (charges) the pressurized gas (for example, air) supplied from the pressurized gas supply device (not shown) to the back surface of the substrate P through the holes, thereby the substrate A gas is interposed between the lower surface of P and the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A (ie, a gas film is formed).
- the pressurized gas for example, air
- the substrate holder 28A sucks the gas between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P through the hole for vacuum suction using a vacuum suction device, and a force (preload in the direction of gravity downward with respect to the substrate P
- the above-mentioned gas film is given rigidity in the direction of gravity by acting.
- the substrate holder 28A floats the substrate P in the Z-axis direction through a minute clearance and holds (supports) the substrate P in a non-contact manner by the balance between the pressure and flow rate of the pressurized gas and the vacuum suction force.
- a force for controlling the flatness may be applied to P.
- Each hole may be formed by processing the substrate holder 28A, or air may be supplied or suctioned by forming the substrate holder 28A with a porous material.
- the upper surface TS is not the surface on which the hole portion is formed, but a virtual surface located above the clearance from the surface, that is, the lower surface of the substrate corrected in plane. Is the upper surface TS.
- two notches 28b are formed apart in the Y-axis direction at the end on the + X side of the top surface TS of the substrate holder 28A.
- the notches 28b are respectively opened on the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A and the side surface on the + X side.
- the substrate transfer apparatus 100A includes a port unit 150A, a substrate transfer unit 160A, and a transfer device 180A.
- the port unit 150A and the substrate transfer unit 160A are installed on the + X side with respect to the stage device 20A.
- delivery of the substrate P between an external apparatus (not shown) such as a coater / developer and the like and the exposure apparatus is performed by the substrate transfer apparatus 100A.
- the substrate transfer unit 160A transfers the exposed substrate P (P1) from the substrate holder 28A to the port unit 150A and transfers the substrate P (P2) to be newly exposed from the port unit 150A to the substrate holder 28A. is there.
- the substrate P2 may be a non-exposed (not exposed once) substrate, or may be a substrate on which the second and subsequent exposures are performed.
- delivery of the substrate P between the above-described external apparatus and the exposure apparatus 10A is performed by using a chamber (not shown) that accommodates the illumination system 12, the mask stage 14, the projection optical system 16, the stage apparatus 20A, the substrate transfer apparatus 100A and the like
- the external transfer device 300 has a fork-like robot hand, and can transfer the loaded substrate P from the external device to the port 150A in the exposure apparatus 10A.
- the substrate transfer unit 160A transfers the substrate P from the port unit 150A to the substrate holder 28A.
- the external transfer device 300 can transfer the exposed substrate P transferred to the port 150A by the substrate transfer device 100A from inside the chamber to the external device.
- the port section 150A has a beam unit 152 composed of a plurality of (for example, eight in the first embodiment) beams 153 arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y-axis direction. .
- a beam unit 152 supplies pressurized gas (for example, air) supplied from a pressurized gas supply device (not shown) between the back surface of the substrate P and the upper surface of the beam unit 152 through the holes (charging , The rear surface of the substrate P can be separated from the upper surface of the beam unit 152 (the substrate P can be floated).
- the spacing between the plurality of beams 153 in the Y-axis direction can support the substrate P from below by the beam unit 152, and when the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is arranged at the same height as the beam unit 152,
- the plurality of finger portions 310 included in each of the plurality of beams 153 are set to be able to be disposed (inserted and removed) between the plurality of beams 153.
- each beam 153 is slightly longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the substrate P, and the length in the width direction (Y-axis direction) is the length in the width direction of the substrate P For example, it is set to about 1/50 or about 10 to 50 times the thickness of the substrate P, for example.
- a plurality of (for example, two) bar-like legs 154 each of a plurality of beams 153 are located inward of both ends in the X-axis direction. Is supported from below. Lower ends of the plurality of legs 154 supporting the beams 153 are respectively connected to the base portion 157 via joint portions 155a, and upper ends are connected to the beams 153 via joint portions 155b.
- the position of the beam unit 152 in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction can be integrally changed by the link mechanism configured by the beam 153, the legs 154, the joint parts 155a and 155b, and the base part 157. It has become.
- the link mechanism is such that the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A, the upper surface of the offset beam 185a described later, and the upper surface of the beam unit 152 are substantially in the same plane when the beam unit 152 stops at the substrate delivery position with the substrate holder 28A. It is configured to be included.
- the substrate transfer unit 160A includes a fork-like hand 161A (hereinafter referred to as a substrate loading hand 161A) similar to the above-described external transfer device 300 (see FIGS. 1 and 2).
- the substrate loading hand 161A has a plurality of (for example, seven in the first embodiment) finger portions 162A, and the plurality of finger portions 162A hold the substrate P (hereinafter referred to as a substrate holding surface). Form).
- the plurality of finger portions 162A are connected to each other near the end on the + X side by the connecting member 163A.
- the end portions on the -X side (the substrate holder 28A (see FIG. 2 and the like) side) of the plurality of finger portions 162A are free ends, and the adjacent finger portions 162A are on the substrate holder 28A side. is open.
- the substrate holding surface formed by the plurality of finger portions 162A is inclined with respect to the holding surface on which the substrate holder 28A holds the substrate (hereinafter referred to as a holder substrate holding surface). That is, the substrate loading hand 161A has a substrate holding surface which holds the substrate P (P2) by inclining with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A. Therefore, the substrate loading hand 161A holds the + X side end of the substrate P2 at a position (+ Z side) higher than the ⁇ X side end of the substrate P2.
- the Z position of the substrate loading hand 161A is such that the ⁇ X side end of the substrate loading hand 161A is closer to the substrate holder 28A than the + X side end.
- the thickness of the finger 162A is thinner toward the tip.
- the finger portion 162A is tapered at its tip end and has a tapered shape. Since the plurality of fingers 162A have a tapered shape, the -X side end of the substrate P2 can be brought closer to the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A as compared with a uniform thickness of the fingers 162A. . Further, since the area of the substrate loading hand 161A in which the Z position approaches the substrate holder 28A can be reduced, the risk of contact between the substrate loading hand 161A and the substrate holder 28A can be reduced.
- the finger portions 162A of the substrate loading hand 161A do not overlap with the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 in plan view in the Y-axis direction, similarly to the robot hand (see FIG. 2) of the external transfer device 300 described above. It is arranged. Further, a plurality of support pads 164A for supporting the back surface of the substrate P is attached to each finger portion 162A, and the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is formed by the support pads 164A. The entire surface of the back surface of the substrate P may not be supported by the support pad 164A. The substrate holding surface is formed by a surface virtually connecting the support surface of the support pad 164A.
- the connecting member 163A is a hollow member having a rectangular shape in a plan view and a small thickness, and extends in the Y-axis direction in which the plurality of beams 153 are arranged. Both ends of the connecting member 163A in the Y-axis direction are connected to a pair of X-axis driving devices 164 for moving the substrate loading hand 161A in the X-axis direction. Note that the pair of X-axis drive devices 164 may be driven independently, or may be mechanically connected by gears or belts and simultaneously driven by one drive motor.
- the connecting member 163A may be configured to be moved only by the X-axis drive device 164 on one side without being limited to a pair in the Y-axis direction.
- the pair of X-axis drive devices 164 can be moved up and down by a Z-axis drive device (not shown).
- the substrate loading hand 161A can move between a position (+ Z side) higher than the upper surface of the beam unit 152 and a position ( ⁇ Z side) lower than the beam unit 152.
- the substrate transfer unit 160A includes one or more (for example, two in the first embodiment) substrate unloading hands 170A.
- two substrate carry-out hands 170A are spaced apart in the Y-axis direction.
- Each substrate unloading hand 170A includes a holding pad 171A.
- the holding pad 171A can hold the lower surface of the substrate P by suction by the vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown).
- the substrate unloading hand 170A is configured, for example, as an articulated robot or a parallel link robot, and can change the X position, the Y position, and the Z position of the holding pad 171A.
- the transfer device 180A is a device that cooperates with the substrate transfer unit 160A at the time of substrate replacement. In other words, in the exposure apparatus 10A, the loading and unloading of the substrate P with respect to the substrate holder 28A is performed using the substrate transfer unit 160A and the transfer device 180A. The transfer device 180A is also used for positioning the substrate P when the substrate P is placed on the substrate holder 28A. The transfer device 180A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (c).
- the transfer device 180A includes a pair of substrate loading bearer devices 182A, a pair of substrate unloading bearer devices 183A, and an offset beam unit 185.
- the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A includes a holding pad 184a, an X actuator 186x, and a Z actuator 186z as shown in FIG. 3 (b).
- the holding pad 184a is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular shape in a plan view, and can hold the lower surface of the substrate P by suction by a vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown). Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, the holding pad 184a can be driven in the Z-axis direction by the Z actuator 186z. The holding pad 184 a and the Z actuator 186 z can be integrally driven in the X axis direction by the X actuator 186 x attached to the substrate table 24.
- the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A includes a holding pad 184b, an X actuator 186x, and a Z actuator 186z.
- the holding pad 184b of one (+ Y side) of the substrate carry-out bearer apparatus 183A is formed on the substrate holder 28A, for example, one (+ Y side) of two notches 28b. A part is inserted into the notch 28b. Further, a part of the holding pad 184b of the other (-Y side) board unloading bearer device 183A is inserted into the other (-Y side) notch 28b.
- the holding pad 184 b is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular shape in a plan view, and can hold the lower surface of the substrate P by suction by a vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown).
- the holding pad 184b can be driven in the Z-axis direction by the Z actuator 186z.
- the holding pad 184 b and the Z actuator 186 z can be integrally driven in the X axis direction by the X actuator 186 x attached to the substrate table 24.
- the Z actuator 186z includes a support that supports the holding pad 184b, and the support is disposed outside the substrate holder 28A.
- the holding pad 184b is driven in the notch 28b by the Z actuator 186z so that the holding pad 184b can move between a position where it can be held in contact with the lower surface of the substrate P and held and a position where it is separated from the lower surface of the substrate P. ing.
- the holding pad 184b is movable by the Z actuator 186z between a position where a part is accommodated in the notch 28b and a position higher than the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A.
- the holding pad 184b is movable in the X-axis direction by being driven integrally with the Z actuator 186z by the X actuator 186x.
- the offset beam portion 185 has a plurality of (for example, eight in the first embodiment) offset beams 185a arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y-axis direction.
- the offset beam 185a is supported by a support member 185b attached to the substrate table 24, and is arranged such that the upper surface thereof and the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A are included in substantially the same plane.
- a plurality of minute holes (not shown) for blowing air are formed on the upper surface of the offset beam 185a.
- the offset beam 185a supplies pressurized gas (air) supplied from a pressurized gas supply device (not shown) between the upper surface of the offset beam 185a and the back surface of the substrate P through the holes (charge supply). Do. As a result, it is possible to separate the back surface of the substrate P from the top surface of the offset beam 185a (float the substrate P).
- each bearer device 182A, 183A is attached to the substrate table 24 in the present embodiment, but is not limited thereto.
- an XY stage device for driving the substrate holder 28A or the substrate table 24 in the XY plane It may be attached to (not shown).
- the position and the number of the bearer devices 182A and 183A are not limited to this, and may be attached to the side surface on the + Y side and the -Y side of the substrate table 24, for example.
- the mask loader (not shown) loads the mask M onto the mask stage 14 under the control of the main controller (not shown).
- the substrate transfer apparatus 100A carries the substrate P onto the substrate holder 28A.
- alignment measurement is performed by the main controller using an alignment detection system (not shown), and after completion of the alignment measurement, step-and-scan exposure is sequentially performed on a plurality of shot areas set on the substrate P An operation is performed. Since this exposure operation is similar to that of the step-and-scan method conventionally performed, the X direction is taken as the scan direction. A detailed description of the step-and-scan exposure operation is omitted.
- the substrate P (P1) for which the exposure processing has been completed is carried out of the substrate holder 28A by the substrate transfer apparatus 100A, and another substrate P (P2) to be exposed next is carried in the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrates P on the substrate holder 28A are exchanged, and a series of exposure operations on the plurality of substrates P are performed.
- Substrate exchange operation the exchange operation of the substrate P on the substrate holder 28A in the exposure apparatus 10A will be described with reference to FIG. 4 to FIG.
- the following substrate exchange operation is controlled by a main controller (not shown).
- the X-axis drive device 164 and the like are appropriately omitted to facilitate understanding of the operation of the substrate transfer unit 160A.
- the exposed substrate P1 is placed on the substrate holder 28A of the stage device 20A in advance, and the substrate P2 different from the substrate P1 is removed while carrying out the exposed substrate P1.
- a loading operation for placing on the substrate holder 28A will be described.
- the operating directions of the components are schematically indicated by white arrows for easy understanding.
- the state of sucking or supplying (charging) the gas is schematically shown by a group of black arrows.
- the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A of the substrate loading hand 161A is a beam unit until the substrate P2 is transferred to the port 150A by the external transfer device 300. It is moved to be located below 152. At this time, the leg 154 of the port portion 150A is rotationally driven in the ⁇ y direction. Thus, the substrate loading hand 161A is disposed below the beam unit 152 so that the robot hand of the external transfer apparatus 300 can be disposed between the beam unit 152 and the substrate loading hand 161A in the Z direction.
- this position of the port portion 150A is a substrate delivery position with the external transfer device 300.
- the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 holding the substrate P 2 is moved in the ⁇ X direction so that the substrate P 2 is positioned above the beam unit 152 (+ Z side). At this time, the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 and the finger of the fork-like robot hand of the external transfer device 300 are positioned in the gaps between the beam units 152 adjacent to each other in the Y-axis direction in plan view. The Y position with the beam unit 152 is positioned.
- the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is driven to descend, and the fingers of the robot hand pass through the gaps of the plurality of beams of the beam unit 152 to perform external transfer.
- the apparatus 300 delivers the substrate P 2 onto the beam unit 152.
- the Z position of the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is controlled so as not to contact the substrate transfer unit 160A waiting below the beam unit 152.
- the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is driven out in the + X direction to withdraw from the inside of the exposure apparatus 10A.
- the substrate transfer unit 160A moves upward (moves in the + Z direction), and the holding pad 171A of the substrate unloading hand 170A suctions and holds the lower surface of the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5A, pressurized gas is supplied to each of the plurality of beams 153 of the beam unit 152 of the port portion 150A, and the pressurized gas is supplied from the upper surface of each of the plurality of beams 153. The air is supplied (jetted) toward the lower surface of the substrate P2.
- the substrate P2 floats up relative to the beam unit 152 via a minute gap (for example, several tens of micrometers to several hundreds of micrometers) while the substrate P2 is adsorbed and supported by the substrate transfer unit 160A. Further, the beam unit 152 is moved in the ⁇ X direction and the ⁇ Z direction by rotationally driving the leg 154 of the port portion 150A in the ⁇ y direction.
- the holding pad 171A of the substrate carry-out hand 170A holding the lower surface of the substrate P2 by suction is appropriately minutely driven in the X-axis, Y-axis, and ⁇ z directions (three degrees of freedom in the horizontal plane), whereby the substrate P2 for the substrate carry-in hand 161A is Position adjustment (alignment) is performed. Since the substrate P2 is supported by the beam unit 152 in a noncontact manner, position adjustment (movement of a small amount) in the direction of three degrees of freedom in the horizontal plane of the substrate P2 can be performed in a low friction state. In addition, position adjustment (alignment) of the board
- the substrate transport unit 160A is driven to rise in the + Z direction to the position shown in FIG. 5 (b).
- the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 is delivered to the substrate loading hand 161A.
- the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 is scooped from below by the substrate loading hand 161A.
- the beam unit 152 is further driven in the ⁇ X direction as the leg 154 is further rotationally driven in the ⁇ y direction, and the substrate delivery position with respect to the substrate holder 28A for unloading the substrate P1 from the substrate holder 28A (FIG. Move to the position shown in c)).
- the stage device 20A places the exposed substrate P1.
- the substrate table 24 is moved in the + X direction so that the placed substrate holder 28A is disposed at a predetermined substrate exchange position (substrate delivery position with respect to the port 150A).
- the substrate replacement position of the substrate holder 28A is the position on the ⁇ X side with respect to the port 150A.
- the substrate holder 28A is illustrated at the same position in FIGS. 4A to 5B for easy understanding, during normal operation of the exposure apparatus 10A, the external transfer of the substrate P2 is performed.
- the exposure operation for the substrate P1 is performed in parallel with the delivery operation from the device 300 to the substrate loading hand 161A, and at this time, the substrate holder 28A is appropriately moved in the X direction and the Y direction.
- the holding pad 184b of each of the pair of substrate carry-out bearer devices 183A is driven to ascend.
- the holding pad 184b is a back surface of a portion of the substrate P1 held by vacuum suction on the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A (a portion disposed on the notch 28b (see FIG. 3A and FIG. 3C)). Hold by suction from
- the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 is moved in the ⁇ X direction.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is moved to the upper side of the substrate holder 28A positioned at the substrate exchange position.
- the Z position of the top surface of the beam unit 152 and the Z position of the top surface of the substrate holder 28A are set to substantially the same height. In order to set these to substantially the same height, the height may be adjusted by driving the substrate holder 28A in the Z-axis direction.
- pressurized gas is ejected from the upper surface of the offset beam 185a.
- pressurized gas is supplied (sprayed) from the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A to the lower surface of the substrate P1.
- the substrate P1 floats from the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A, and the friction between the lower surface of the substrate P1 and the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A is in a low friction state.
- the holding pad 184b of the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A is slightly raised and driven in the + Z direction so as to follow the floating operation of the substrate P1, and a part of the substrate P1 is held by suction. Then, it is moved in the + X direction (port 150A side) with a predetermined stroke.
- the amount of movement of the holding pad 184b (ie, the substrate P1) is set to, for example, about 50 mm to 100 mm.
- the end on the + X side of the substrate P1 is supported by the offset beam 185a in a noncontact manner, and the position of the substrate P1 is offset from the substrate holder 28A in the X direction by a predetermined amount in the + X direction.
- the holding pads 184a of the pair of substrate loading bearer devices 182A are moved in the + X direction with a predetermined stroke.
- the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 is disposed at a predetermined position above the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate P2 is positioned almost right above the substrate holder 28A positioned at the substrate exchange position.
- the substrate loading hand 161A and the substrate holder 28A are positioned such that the Y position of the substrate P1 and the Y position of the substrate P2 substantially coincide with each other.
- the substrate P1 and the substrate P2 are disposed at different positions.
- the X positions of the substrates P1 and P2 are relatively different from each other by the offset of the substrate P1 from the substrate holder 28A to the + X side, and the end of the substrate P2 on the -X side Are disposed (projected) closer to the ⁇ X side than the end on the ⁇ X side of the substrate P1.
- the lower surface of the substrate P2 on the substrate loading hand 161A may be suction-held by the substrate carry-out hand 170A, or may be held by suction holding or frictional force by the finger portion 162A.
- the notch 28b may not be formed in the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate P can be offset from the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A to the + X side by moving the substrate P in the + X-axis direction while holding the holding pad 184b, the notch 28b is placed on the substrate holder 28A. It does not have to be formed. In this case, planar correction on the substrate holder 28A can be performed even at the end of the substrate P.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is driven in the ⁇ Z direction to a position not in contact with the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate loading hand 161A brings the ⁇ X side end of the substrate P2 (a part of the substrate P2) into contact with the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A.
- the holding pad 184a sucks and holds a part of the substrate P2 on the substrate loading hand 161A from below.
- the holding pad 184a holds a part of the substrate P2 by suction at a position between the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A and the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161A at a position in the Z-axis direction.
- the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A holds a narrow area of the ⁇ X side end of the substrate P2. More specifically, the area is such that the entire substrate P2 can not be supported by the substrate loading bearer device 182A alone.
- the X-direction dimension of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand 161A is described as being shorter than the X-direction dimension of the substrate P2, the dimension may be similar or the X dimension of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand 161A. It may be longer. In that case, the holding pad 184a may hold an area between the finger and the finger of the substrate loading hand 161A.
- the substrate carry-out hand 170A releasing the suction gripping of the substrate P2 is driven, and a portion of the substrate P1 offset to the + X side from the substrate holder 28A. Hold the lower surface by suction. Further, the beam unit 152 ejects pressurized gas.
- pressurized gas may be supplied (jetted) from the finger portion 162A of the substrate loading hand 161A to the lower surface of the substrate P2 to reduce the contact friction.
- the substrate transport unit 160A is driven in the unloading direction (+ X direction), and the substrate unloading hand 170A holding the substrate P1 is driven in the + X direction.
- the substrate P1 is moved from the substrate holder 28A to the port 150A (beam unit 152).
- pressurized gas is jetted from the upper surface of each of the beams 153 of the beam unit 152, the substrate P1 is in a non-contact state (floating state) with respect to the substrate holder 28A and the port portion 150A. It is carried out from 28A.
- the holding pad 184b of each of the pair of substrate carry-out bearer devices 183A is -Z so that a part is accommodated in the notch 28b of the substrate holder 28A (see FIGS. 3A and 3C). It is driven in the direction and the -X direction.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is moved in the + X direction, whereby the substrate P2 partially held by the holding pad 184a.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is moved relative to the X direction.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is moved to the + X side with respect to the substrate holder 28A in the X direction, so that the substrate loading hand 161A is in the upper space (+ Z side) of the substrate holder 28A. Space) and the lower side of the substrate P2 (the space on the -Z side).
- the substrate loading hand 161A is moved to the + X side with respect to the substrate holder 28A, so that it is retracted from the space between the substrate P2 partially held by the holding pad 184a and the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate loading hand 161A moves to the + X side with respect to the substrate holder 28A
- the substrate loading hand 161A moves above the substrate holder 28A, that is, at a position where the Z position is higher than the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from the space between the substrate P2 and the substrate holder 28A, whereby the substrate P2 is delivered from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate holder 28A. That is, the substrate P2 is carried from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate holder 28A.
- the region between the substrate loading hand 161A and the holding pad 184a is held by the substrate holder 28A.
- the holding pad 184a adsorbs and holds a part of the substrate P2, thereby limiting the relative position of the substrate P2 to the substrate holder 28A in a fixed or predetermined minute movable range in the X and Y directions. ing.
- the predetermined movable range is set by the drive range of the holding pad 184a with respect to the substrate holder 28A (or the substrate table 24). If the holding pad 184a has a function of setting the relative position (relative movable range) of the substrate P2 to the substrate holder 28A with respect to at least one of the X direction and the Y direction, the substrate table 24 (or It does not have to be installed in the substrate holder 28A). For example, it may be installed in a structure such as a column (not shown) of the exposure apparatus 10A and may be suspended from above the substrate holder 28A. In this case, the holding pad 184a may hold the upper surface of the substrate P2.
- the substrate loading hand 161A moves relative to the substrate holder 28A in the + X direction, that is, in the direction along the substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, in the direction parallel to the substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate P2 is retracted from below P2
- a part of the substrate P2 is sequentially placed on the substrate holder 28A from the -X side.
- the area of the substrate P2 held by the substrate loading hand 161A decreases, and the area of the substrate P2 supported by the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A increases.
- the period until the tip of the substrate loading hand 161A on the -X side is moved to the + X side from the substrate holder 28A that is, all the substrate loading hand 161A is from the space between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2.
- the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate holder 28A and the holding pad 184a simultaneously support (or hold) different portions of the substrate P2 respectively.
- the substrate loading hand 161A the substrate holder 28A and the holding pad 184a (an optional part of the substrate P2 is the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate holder 28A and (Supported by any of the holding pads 184a).
- the support (or holding) of the substrate P2 by the substrate loading hand 161A and the substrate holder 28A is not limited to being in a contact state, but is a support (or holding) in a non-contact state via a gas (air gap) It is also good.
- the Z-axis direction of the supported portion of the substrate P2 by the substrate loading hand 161A during the period until the tip of the substrate loading hand 161A on the ⁇ X side is moved to the + X side from the substrate holder 28A ( The position (Z position) with respect to the direction perpendicular to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A is higher than the Z position of the portion of the substrate P2 held by the holding pad 184a.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from the space between the substrate P2 and the substrate holder 28A in the + X direction as described above, the position in the Z-axis direction of the supported portion of the substrate P2 supported by the substrate holder 28A ( Z position) decreases gradually.
- the portion in which the substrate P2 is held by the holding pad 184a is a circle with respect to the ⁇ y direction as the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted. It comes to land on the substrate holder 28A so as to exercise, but also in this case, the Z position of the supported portion of the substrate P2 by the substrate loading hand 161A gradually decreases. Further, the position (X position) of the supported portion of the substrate P2 supported by the substrate holder 28A in the X axis direction is gradually moved in the + X direction.
- a position measurement device (not shown)
- the holding pad 184a of each of the pair of substrate loading bearer devices 182A is driven in at least one of the X axis direction and the Y axis direction.
- the position in the X-axis direction, the position in the Y-axis direction, and the angle in the ⁇ z direction of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28A are adjusted.
- a position measurement device may be disposed, for example, on at least one of the stage device 20A (for example, the substrate holder 28A and the substrate table 24) or a structure such as a column (not shown) provided in the exposure device 10A.
- the substrate P2 transferred from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate holder 28A is placed on the substrate holder 28A except for the portion suctioned and held by the holding pad 184a.
- the holding pad 184a may be driven in the Z-axis direction to assist the operation of delivering the substrate P2 to the substrate holder 28A.
- the supply (spray) of pressurized gas from the substrate holder 28A is an air resistance, so that the substrate P2 can be prevented from directly colliding with the substrate holder 28A, and breakage of the substrate P2 can be prevented.
- the pressurized gas is not supplied (jetted) from the substrate holder 28A, the air between the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 becomes air resistance, and the above-described effect is obtained.
- the substrate P2 lands on the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A and comes into contact with the upper surface TS.
- the position in the X-axis direction, the position in the Y-axis direction, and the angle in the ⁇ z direction of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28A are not changed.
- the beam unit 152 stops the ejection of the pressurized gas to the substrate P1.
- the substrate unloading hand 170A releases the gripping of the substrate P1.
- the substrate transport unit 160A is driven to ascend.
- the beam unit 152 on which the substrate P1 is mounted is moved to the substrate delivery position with respect to the external transfer device 300.
- the holding pad 184a moves in the -X direction so as to release the suction gripping of the substrate P2 and withdraw from the lower side of the substrate P2. Do. Thus, the portion of the substrate P2 held by the holding pad 184a is placed on the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A.
- the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is driven in the ⁇ X direction at a Z position lower than the beam unit 152, and is disposed below the beam unit 152.
- the stage device 20A moves to a predetermined exposure start position while holding the substrate P2 by suction by the substrate holder 28A.
- the description of the operation of the stage device 20A at the time of the exposure operation to the substrate P2 is omitted.
- the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is moved upward, and scoops the substrate P1 on the beam unit 152 from below.
- the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 holding the exposed substrate P1 is moved in the + X direction and exits the exposure device 10A.
- the beam unit 152 is moved in the ⁇ X direction to avoid contact with the substrate loading hand 161A, and the substrate loading hand 161A is moved in the + X direction.
- the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 holds the substrate P3 on which the exposure is to be performed next to the substrate P2. Then, it is moved toward the port unit 150A.
- the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is lower than the lower surface of the beam unit 152 until the new substrate P3 is transported to the port 150A by the external transfer device 300.
- the substrate transfer unit 160A is lowered (moved in the -Z direction) so as to be positioned.
- the substrate P2 is held by the substrate loading hand 161A and the holding pad 184a from the state held only by the substrate loading hand 161A. Then, the substrate P2 is held by the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate loading bearer device 182A, and the substrate holder 28A as the substrate loading hand 161A moves relative to the substrate holder 28A. Then, as shown in FIG. 7C, when the substrate loading hand 161A is moved to a position where the position of the substrate loading hand 161A in the X-axis direction does not overlap with the substrate holder 28A, the substrate P2 is moved with the substrate loading bearer device 182A. It is held by the substrate holder 28A and finally supported only by the substrate holder 28A. The substrate P2 is carried into the substrate holder 28A while being held by any one of the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate holder 28A and the holding pad 184a.
- the operation of unloading the substrate P1 from the substrate holder 28A and the operation of loading the substrate P2 into the substrate holder 28A can be performed at least partially in parallel, and the substrate exchange for the substrate holder 28A Time can be shortened.
- the substrate carry-in hand 161A moves above the substrate holder 28A (the space on the + Z side), so there is nothing to interfere on the moving path, and the substrate is carried in quickly.
- the hand 161A can be driven.
- the operation of loading the substrate P2 into the substrate holder 28A can be performed quickly, so that the substrate exchange time can be shortened.
- the substrate P2 can be carried into the substrate holder 28A while carrying out the substrate P1 from the substrate holder 28A by the operation of moving the substrate loading hand 161A to the + X side above the substrate holder 28A. That is, since a common drive system is used at the time of substrate loading and at the time of substrate unloading, it is not necessary to provide separate drive systems at the time of substrate loading and at the time of substrate unloading, and the number of driving systems can be reduced.
- the substrate transfer apparatus 100A for transferring the substrate P2 to the substrate holder 28A the substrate loading hand 161A for holding the substrate P2 above the substrate holder 28A and the substrate
- the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A holding a part of the substrate P2 held by the loading hand 161A, and the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A, and the substrate such that the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from above the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading hand 161A, and the substrate loading bearer device 182A move relative to each other by the X-axis driving device 164. Hold the substrate P2.
- the substrate P2 is sequentially mounted on the substrate holder 28A from the end on the -X side (the side opposite to the port 150A), so that the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 are not easily damaged, and dust is generated due to contact Decreases.
- air stagnation is less likely to occur between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2, and the substrate P2 is less likely to be wrinkled.
- the situation in which the substrate P2 moves on the substrate holder 28A can be suppressed.
- the placement of the substrate holder 28A of the substrate P2 can be controlled (for example, the placement is stopped halfway) in accordance with the retracting condition (speed and position) of the substrate loading hand 161A. Therefore, in order to reduce friction from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate P2, the pressurized gas may not be jetted.
- the mechanism for driving the substrate loading bearer device 182A up and down can be omitted.
- the substrate P2 is provided above the holder substrate holding surface, and part of the substrate P2 and the holder substrate holding A substrate loading hand 161A for holding the substrate P2 in a state in which the distance to the surface is shorter than the distance between the other portion of the substrate P2 and the holder substrate holding surface, and the other portion of the substrate P2 held by the substrate loading hand 161A
- the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading bearer device 182A, and the substrate loading hand 161A are relative to the direction along the holder substrate holding surface such that the substrate loading bearer device 182A and the substrate loading hand 161A are retracted from above the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate P2 can be placed on the substrate holder 28A sequentially from the end on the -X side (the opposite side to the port 150A), so the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 are not easily damaged, and contact is made Dust generation due to In addition, air stagnation is less likely to occur between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2, and the substrate P2 is less likely to be wrinkled. Further, the situation in which the substrate P2 moves on the substrate holder 28A can be suppressed. Further, the placement of the substrate holder 28A of the substrate P2 can be controlled (for example, the placement is stopped halfway) in accordance with the retracting condition (speed and position) of the substrate loading hand 161A. Therefore, in order to reduce friction from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate P2, the pressurized gas may not be jetted. Further, the mechanism for moving the substrate loading bearer device 182A up and down can be omitted.
- the substrate holding device holds the substrate P2 above the substrate holder 28A.
- a substrate loading hand 161A having a surface, and a substrate loading bearer device 182A for holding a part of the substrate P2 held by the substrate loading hand 161A at a position between the holder substrate holding surface and the substrate holding surface in the vertical direction;
- the substrate loading bearer device 182A holds a part of the substrate P2 so that the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from above the substrate holder 28A
- the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading bearer device 182A and the substrate loading hand 161A are And an X-axis drive device 164 for relative movement.
- the substrate P2 can be placed on the substrate holder 28A sequentially from the end on the -X side (the opposite side to the port 150A), so the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 are not easily damaged, and contact is made Dust generation due to In addition, air stagnation is less likely to occur between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2, and the substrate P2 is less likely to be wrinkled. Further, the situation in which the substrate P2 moves on the substrate holder 28A can be suppressed. Further, the placement of the substrate holder 28A of the substrate P2 can be controlled (for example, the placement is stopped halfway) in accordance with the retracting condition (speed and position) of the substrate loading hand 161A. Therefore, in order to reduce friction from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate P2, the pressurized gas may not be jetted. Further, the mechanism for moving the substrate loading bearer device 182A up and down can be omitted.
- the substrate transfer apparatus 100A for transferring the substrate P2 to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading hand 161A for holding the substrate P2 above the substrate holder 28A, and the substrate loading The substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A holding a part of the substrate P2 held by the hand 161A, and the substrate loading 28A and the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A and the substrate loading so that the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from above the substrate holder 28A.
- the X axis driving device 164 relatively moves the hand 161A in a predetermined direction along the holder substrate holding surface.
- the substrate P2 is set so that the vertical position of the region held by the hand 161A approaches the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate P2 can be placed on the substrate holder 28A sequentially from the end on the -X side (the opposite side to the port 150A), so the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 are not easily damaged, and contact is made Dust generation due to In addition, air stagnation is less likely to occur between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2, and the substrate P2 is less likely to be wrinkled. Further, the situation in which the substrate P2 moves on the substrate holder 28A can be suppressed.
- the placement of the substrate holder 28A of the substrate P2 can be controlled (for example, the placement is stopped halfway) in accordance with the retracting condition (speed and position) of the substrate loading hand 161A. Therefore, in order to reduce friction from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate P2, the pressurized gas may not be jetted. Further, the mechanism for moving the substrate loading bearer device 182A up and down can be omitted.
- the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is provided to be inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface.
- the substrate loading hand 161A retracts from between the substrate P2 and the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading hand 161A moves away from the lower surface of the inclined substrate P2 (different from the tangential direction of the lower surface of the substrate P2). Since it retracts, contact wear can be reduced.
- the X-axis drive device 164 is one of the substrate holder 28A, the substrate carry-in bearer device 182A, and the substrate carry-in hand 161A in the direction along the holding surface where the substrate holder 28A holds the substrate P2. Move relative to the other.
- the substrate loading hand 161A retracts in a direction away from the lower surface of the inclined substrate P2 (a direction different from the tangential direction of the lower surface of the substrate P2), so that contact wear can be reduced.
- the X-axis drive device 164 moves the substrate loading hand 161A in a direction parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate loading hand 161A retracts in a direction away from the lower surface of the inclined substrate P2 (horizontal direction different from the tangential direction of the lower surface of the substrate P2), so that contact wear can be reduced.
- the first modification is an example in which the configuration of the substrate transfer apparatus is changed. Specifically, in the substrate transfer apparatus 100B of the exposure apparatus 10B according to the first modification, the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, and the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is a substrate A drive system is provided which switches between the holder 28A and the holder substrate holding surface.
- the state of FIG. 9A shows a state in which the stage device 20A is disposed at the substrate delivery position with the port portion 150A after the state of FIG. 5A in the first embodiment.
- the substrate P2 is placed on the substrate loading hand 161A.
- the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 from the lower side holds the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A substantially parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, -X. Driven in the direction.
- the operations of the stage device 20A, the substrate loading bearer device 182A, the substrate unloading bearer device 183A, and the offset beam 185a are the same as the operations described with reference to FIG.
- the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 from below is disposed at a predetermined position above the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is driven to rise, it is driven to tilt its tip downward. That is, the substrate loading hand 161A is driven such that the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A. Thereby, the tip of the substrate P2 contacts the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A. The holding pad 184a suction-holds the vicinity of the end on the -X side of the substrate P2.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A at the Z position where there is no risk that the tip contacts the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A even if the front end is driven to tilt downward. You may make it move to-X direction, maintaining it.
- the substrate P2 when the substrate P2 is transferred between the port 150A and the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate P2 is placed from one side with the substrate mounting surface of the port 150A parallel to the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A. Since it can be delivered to the other, the possibility of breakage of the substrate P2 at the time of substrate delivery can be reduced.
- the distance between the port 150A and the substrate holder 28A and the substrate loading hand 161A in the Z direction can be increased.
- the risk of the port portion 150A and / or the substrate holder 28A and the substrate loading hand 161A coming into contact is reduced.
- the substrate loading hand 161A may be moved relative to the substrate holder 28A in the + X direction while gradually changing the inclination angle between the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A and the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A. .
- the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161A may be inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A by inclining the substrate loading hand 161A.
- FIG. 10A is a perspective view of a substrate loading hand 161C according to a second modification
- FIG. 10B is a side view of a substrate loading hand 161C according to the second modification.
- the finger portion 162C is thicker at the + X side end and thinner as it approaches the ⁇ X side end. It has a triangular shape in cross section.
- the shape of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand may be a triangular XZ cross-section, which becomes thinner toward the + X side end and closer to the ⁇ X side end.
- the rigidity of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand is improved, and the substrate loading hand 161C is shaken when moving the substrate loading hand 161C, and the substrate loading hand 161C and the substrate holder 28A are in contact due to the fluctuation.
- the drive mechanism for inclining the substrate loading hand 161A as in the first modification with respect to the substrate holder 28A can be omitted.
- the tip of the substrate P2 is brought into contact with the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A by being moved downward.
- the front end of the substrate P2 is brought into contact with the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A using the substrate unloading hand 170A.
- FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 6 (a) of the first embodiment
- FIG. 11 (b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 6 (b) of the first embodiment.
- the substrate transfer unit 160D includes a substrate loading hand 161C according to the second variation and a substrate output hand 170A. And.
- the substrate delivery position of the substrate loading hand 161C with the stage device 20A is on the + X side of the substrate delivery position of the substrate loading hand 161A in FIG. 6A. It is in position.
- the substrate unloading hand 170A holding the lower surface of the substrate P2 by suction is driven so as to extend the arm, as shown in FIG. 11 (b).
- the substrate P2 slides down along the substrate loading hand 161C, and the tip of the substrate P2 contacts the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A.
- the support pad 164D attached to the upper surface of the finger portion 162C of the substrate loading hand 161C is preferably in the shape of a bar extending in the extending direction of the finger portion 162C in order to smooth the movement of the substrate. Further, when the substrate P2 is slid, the pressurized gas may be ejected from the support pad 164D.
- the substrate transport unit 160D may include a plurality of substrate unloading hands 170A.
- the exposed substrate P1 on the substrate holder 28A is held by the remaining substrate carry-out hand 170A while the tip of the substrate P2 is in contact with the holding pad 184a by a part of the plurality of substrate carry-out hands 170A. Good.
- the substrate carry-in hand 161C is moved in the + X direction to carry out the substrate carry-in operation and the substrate carry-out operation. And can be done in parallel.
- the substrate P2 is lowered by the substrate carry-out hand 170A instead of moving the entire substrate transfer unit 160D, so positioning can be performed more easily and accurately than when the entire substrate transfer unit 160D is moved. it can.
- the stroke in the X axis direction of the substrate transfer unit 160D can be shortened.
- the tip of the substrate P2 can be shortened even if the movement distance of the substrate loading hand 161C in the X-axis direction is shorter than the horizontal movement component of the substrate P2 due to the gradient of the substrate loading hand 161C It can be made to approach holding pad 184a of substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A.
- the substrate loading hand 161C according to the second modification is used, but the substrate loading hand 161A according to the first embodiment may be used.
- FIG. 12 (a) is a top view of a substrate loading hand 161E according to a fourth modification
- FIG. 12 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 12 (a).
- finger portions 162E1 at both ends in the Y-axis direction among the plurality of finger portions 162E include the belt portion 166.
- the belt portion 166 includes a belt 166a and a pair of pulleys 166b.
- the belt 166a is disposed substantially parallel to the upper surface of the finger portion 162E1 so that the upper surface thereof forms substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the support pad 164E disposed on the finger portion 162E1 so as to contact the back surface of the substrate P2.
- the belt 166a is made of a material having a large non-slip coefficient of friction, and is selected from, for example, urethane-coated stainless steel, silicon, rubber, or flexible PVC (polyvinyl chloride).
- FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are diagrams showing the loading operation of the substrate P2 into the substrate holder 28A using the substrate loading hand 161E.
- the substrate loading hand 161E is held in a state where the holding pad 184a holds the tip of the substrate P2.
- the substrate holder 28A is relatively moved in the + X direction.
- the belt 166a is made of a material having a large coefficient of friction, as shown in FIG. 13B, the belt 166a in contact with the substrate P2 has a pair of pulleys together with the relative movement of the substrate P2 to the substrate loading hand 161E. It moves circularly by 166b.
- the belt 166a descends obliquely on the substrate loading hand 161E while keeping the position of the substrate P2 in the Y-axis direction restrained. Therefore, the substrate P2 is carried into the substrate holder 28A in a state of being restrained by the belt 166a until immediately before the entire substrate P2 leaves the substrate carrying hand 161E.
- the substrate loading hand is moved (retracted) in the + X direction, with the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A holding the substrate P2 at the -X side end. (For example, FIG.6 (c) etc.).
- the movement of the Y-axis direction is not restricted until the portion other than the ⁇ X side end of the substrate P2 is supported by the substrate holder 28A.
- the substrate loading hand 161E is moved in the + X direction with the holding pad 184a holding the ⁇ X side edge of the substrate P2, the + X side edge is transferred by the substrate loading hand 161E.
- the substrate P2 is placed on the substrate holder 28A while holding and restraining the movement in the Y-axis direction. Therefore, according to the fourth modification, the substrate P2 can be restrained until immediately before the entire substrate P2 leaves the substrate loading hand 161E, so that the mounting displacement of the substrate P2 can be prevented.
- the belt unit 166 may control the feed by a motor or the like.
- the belt 166a may be fed out in synchronization with the timing at which the substrate loading hand 161E is moved backward.
- the belt 166a may not be an endless belt.
- the belts 166a of the finger portions 162E1 at both ends are moved independently, relative position adjustment (alignment) of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28A can be performed on the substrate loading hand 161E.
- the fifth modification is to change the configuration of the finger of the substrate loading hand.
- FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B are cross sectional views schematically showing a substrate loading hand 161F according to the fifth modification.
- the finger portion 162F of the substrate loading hand 161F has a first finger portion 162F1 and a second finger portion 162F2.
- the first finger portion 162F1 is hollow, and a wire rope 169A for moving the second finger portion 162F2 is disposed therein.
- the second finger portion 162F2 is coupled to the first finger portion 162F1 rotatably around the Y axis via a pin 169B and the like.
- a wire rope 169A is connected to the second finger portion 162F2.
- the second finger portion 162F2 rotates around the Y axis with the pin 169B as a fulcrum. Thereby, only a partial region of the substrate P2 held by the second finger portion 162F2 can be inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A.
- the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.
- the substrate loading hand 161F may not have a drive mechanism by the wire rope 169A, and the second finger portion 162F2 may always be inclined with respect to the first finger portion 162F1.
- the drive mechanism for tilting the substrate loading hand 161A as in the first modification can be omitted.
- the tip of the second finger portion 162F2 can be thinned.
- the configuration of the exposure apparatus 10G according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the configuration and operation of a part of the substrate transfer apparatus are different, so only the differences will be described below.
- symbol as the said 1st Embodiment is attached
- FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B are respectively a top view and a side view of an exposure apparatus 10G according to the second embodiment.
- 16 (a) and 16 (b) are perspective views of a substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment.
- the substrate holder 28A is provided with the notch 28b that accommodates the holding pad 184b of the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A (see FIGS. 3A and 3C).
- the substrate holder 28G according to the second embodiment is provided with a notch 28a for receiving the holding pad 184a of the substrate carry-in bearer apparatus 182G in addition to the notch 28b.
- each of the plurality of beams 153 provided in the beam unit 152 has a plurality of (for example, two) bar-like legs 154 extending in the Z-axis direction, rather than both ends in the X-axis direction. It is supported from below at the inner position. A plurality of legs 154 supporting the respective beams 153 are connected by a base plate 156 near their lower end portions.
- the beam unit 152 is integrally moved in the X axis direction with a predetermined stroke by moving the base plate 156 in the X axis direction with a predetermined stroke by the X actuator (not shown). ing.
- the base plate 156 is moved in the Z-axis direction by the Z actuator 158, so that the beam unit 152 can be integrally moved up and down in the Z-axis direction.
- the base plate 156 is not shown in FIG. 15A and the following top views.
- the substrate loading hand 161G has a plurality of (for example, eight in this embodiment) finger portions 162G.
- the plurality of finger portions 162G are connected to each other near the end on the -X side by a connecting member 163G.
- the connecting member 163G is configured to be capable of floatingly supporting the substrate P by supplying (supplying) a gas to the back surface of the substrate P held by the substrate loading hand 161G.
- the ends on the + X side of the plurality of finger portions 162G are free ends, and the adjacent finger portions 162G are open to the port portion 150G side.
- the finger portions 162G are arranged such that the positions in the Y-axis direction do not overlap with the plurality of beams of the beam unit 152 in a plan view.
- the finger portions 162G1 at both ends in the Y-axis direction have a thickness on the -X side (substrate holder 28G side) in side view It is thin and has a triangular shape in which the + X side (port portion 150G side) is thick.
- the thickness of the inner finger portion 162G2 on the port portion side is thinner than that of the finger portions 162G1 on both ends.
- arms 168 of the substrate loading hand 161G are attached to the finger portions 162G1 at both ends of FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). As shown in FIG. 15A, both ends of the arm 168 are connected to the X-axis drive device 164.
- the substrate loading hand 161G has a pair of substrate pick hands 167G provided on the finger portions 162G1 at both ends in the Y-axis direction.
- the substrate pick hand 167G can be moved in a predetermined stroke in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction by a drive device (not shown).
- the substrate pick hand 167G can suction and hold the lower surface of the substrate P by the vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown).
- the substrate loading bearer device 182G is different from the substrate loading bearer device 182A of the first embodiment in that the X actuator 186x is omitted.
- the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182G is moved within the notch 28a by the Z actuator 186z to contact the lower surface of the substrate P, and the lower surface of the substrate P. It is movable between a position away from
- the holding pad 184a can be moved by the Z actuator 186z between a position where a part is accommodated in the notch 28a and a position higher than the upper surface of the substrate holder 28G.
- the external transfer device 300 is moved in the -Z direction to place the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152. . Thereafter, the external transfer device 300 is moved in the + X direction and exits the exposure device.
- the substrate loading hand 161G is driven in the + X direction, and enters under the beam unit 152 from the -X side (substrate holder 28G side).
- the stage device 20G which has completed the exposure process moves to the substrate delivery position with the substrate transfer unit 160G.
- the beam unit 152 is driven downward (driven in the ⁇ Z direction) by the Z actuator 158 while holding the substrate P2. At this time, a part of the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 is in contact with the substrate pick hand 167G of the substrate loading hand 161G.
- the substrate pick hand 167G suctions and holds the lower surface of the substrate P2.
- the substrate P1 on the substrate holder 28G is offset in the + X direction by the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A.
- the substrate holder 28G and the offset beam 185a supply (charge) a gas to the back surface of the substrate P1 so that the substrate P is moved in a floating state.
- Pressurized gas is ejected from each beam 153 of the beam unit 152. Also, the beam unit 152 continues to descend gradually.
- the substrate loading hand 161G is gradually moved in the ⁇ X direction while holding the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 by suction with the substrate pick hand 167G.
- the substrate P2 moves in the -X direction along with the movement of the substrate loading hand 161G in the -X direction.
- the substrate loading hand 161G is moved in the -X direction to the X position where the crotch of the finger 162G and the beam unit 152 do not overlap in plan view. Ru.
- the beam unit 152 is moved down to the lower side of the substrate loading hand 161G, and completely transfers the new substrate P2 to the substrate loading hand 161G. At this time, on the substrate loading hand 161G, the relative position of the substrate P2 to the substrate loading hand 161G may be adjusted by the pair of substrate pick hands 167G.
- the substrate loading hand 161G is moved in the ⁇ X direction while holding the substrate P2, and arranged at a predetermined position above the substrate holder 28G.
- the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182G is driven to rise by the Z actuator 186z.
- the substrate loading hand 161G pushes the substrate P2 obliquely downward by the substrate pick hand 167G.
- the end on the ⁇ X side of the substrate P2 contacts the holding pad 184a.
- the holding pad 184a contacts the substrate P2 on the substrate loading hand 161G waiting from above the substrate holder 28G from below, and holds the vicinity of the end portion on the ⁇ X side of the substrate P2 by suction.
- the substrate pick hand 167G may adjust the position of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28G.
- the substrate carry-out hand 170A is moved, and the lower surface of the portion of the substrate P1 offset to the + X side from the substrate holder 28G is held by suction.
- the beam unit 152 is moved in the ⁇ X direction and the ⁇ Z direction, and stops at the substrate delivery position with the substrate holder 28G. Further, pressurized gas is ejected from each beam 153 of the beam unit 152. Thus, the beam unit 152 serves as a guide for supporting the substrate P1 carried out of the substrate holder 28G.
- the gripping of the substrate P2 by the substrate pick hand 167G of the substrate loading hand 161G is released, and as shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182G is the substrate P2.
- the substrate transfer unit 160G is driven in the unloading direction (+ X side) in a state where the ⁇ X side end portion is suctioned and held.
- the substrate unloading hand 170A holding the substrate P1 is also driven in the + X direction.
- the substrate P1 moves from above the substrate holder 28G to the port 150G (beam unit 152).
- the substrate P1 since pressurized gas is ejected from the upper surface of the beam unit 152, the substrate P1 is not in contact with the substrate holder 28G and the port 150G (except for the portion held by the substrate carry-out hand 170A). ) And is transported.
- the substrate unloading hand 170A releases the grip of the substrate P1 and is moved in the ⁇ X direction together with the substrate loading hand 161G.
- the port 150G is moved in the + X direction while holding the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152.
- the substrate loading bearer device 182G adjusts the position of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28G
- the substrate loading bearer device 182G is moved in the ⁇ Z direction by the Z actuator 186z, and a part thereof is accommodated in the notch 28a.
- the substrate P2 is adsorbed to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28G.
- substrate P2 described here can be abbreviate
- the external transfer device 300 transfers a new substrate P3 to the port 150A.
- the port portion 150G side is open between the adjacent finger portions 162G of the substrate loading hand 161G.
- the substrate loading hand 161G directly enters the lower side of the beam unit 152 from the substrate holder 28G side and is driven to the upper side of the beam unit 152 to scoop the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152, thereby the substrate holder It can move to the 28G side. Therefore, even in a state where the substrate P2 is mounted on the beam unit 152, the substrate loading hand 161G can enter below the substrate P2 with a short moving distance in the X-axis direction.
- the substrate loading hand 161G can receive the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 without moving to the position on the + X side of the port 150G. Further, the substrate loading hand 161G can deliver the exposed substrate P1 onto the beam unit 152 without having to move to the position on the + X side of the port portion 150G. That is, a series of operations of loading the substrate P2 and unloading the substrate P1 can be performed without changing the positional relationship in the X direction between the external transfer device 300, the port 150G, the substrate loading hand 161G, and the substrate holder 28G.
- the footprint of the exposure apparatus that is, the installation area of the exposure apparatus 10G can be reduced. it can.
- the substrate P carried out to the port 150G (beam unit 152) is carried in again without the external transfer device 300. It can be delivered to the hand 161G and carried into the substrate holder 28G.
- the plurality of finger portions 162G of the substrate loading hand 161G are mutually connected by the connecting member 163G in the vicinity of the end portion on the ⁇ X side (the substrate holder 28G side).
- the substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment can install the substrate P2 on the substrate holder 28G without distortion as compared with the substrate loading hand 161A.
- the space between the finger portions 162A is open on the ⁇ X side. Therefore, the edge on the -X side of the substrate P2 immediately before being installed on the substrate holder 28A is a minute amount because there is a region supported by the finger portion 162A and a region not supported as shown in FIG. However, there are cases where it is difficult to place the substrate P2 on the substrate holder 28A without distortion.
- the substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment does not open between the adjacent finger portions 162G on the -X side and is continuous.
- the substrate loading hand 161G can set the substrate P2 on the substrate holder 28G without distortion as compared with the substrate loading hand 161A.
- the substrate loading hand 161G is moved to the substrate P2 and the substrate holder by moving the substrate transfer unit 160G (substrate loading hand 161G) and the stage device 20G (substrate holder 28G) in opposite directions. Evacuate from 28G. Thereby, the carrying-in time to the board
- the thickness of the port portion side of the inner finger portions 162G2 other than the finger portions 162G1 at both ends is thinner than the finger portions 162G1 at both ends (See, for example, FIG. 16 (b)). Thereby, the weight of the substrate loading hand 161G can be reduced.
- the substrate loading hand 161G can support the central portion of the substrate P2, and the substrate The carry-in hand 161G can be made smaller. Furthermore, since the arms 168 of the substrate loading hand 161G are attached to the finger portions 162G1 at both ends, since the center of gravity of the entire substrate loading hand 161G is supported, bending of the substrate loading hand 161G can be suppressed.
- the Z position (pass line) for delivering the substrate between the external transfer device 300 and the beam unit 152 of the port 150G is set to a position higher than the upper surface of the substrate holder 28G.
- the height of the pass line can be freely set (no restriction).
- FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are diagrams for explaining the substrate exchange operation in the first modified example.
- the external transfer device 300 places the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 stopped at a position lower than the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28G.
- the substrate loading hand 161G is vertically moved.
- the substrate P2 can be delivered to the substrate loading hand 161G even when there is no drive device to move to the position.
- the substrate carried out to the port 150G (beam unit 152) is again read even without the external transfer device 300. It can be delivered to the substrate loading hand 161G and loaded into the substrate holder 28G.
- the second modification is an example in which the configuration of the substrate transfer apparatus is changed.
- the substrate transfer unit 160I includes a drive system that rotationally moves the substrate loading hand 161I around the Y axis. That is, the substrate loading hand 161I can tilt the substrate holding surface around the Y axis by the drive system.
- the stroke of the substrate pick hand 167I provided in the substrate loading hand 161I is longer than the substrate pick hand 167G of the second embodiment.
- the distance from the ⁇ X side end of the substrate loading hand 161I to the base of the finger portion 162I, that is, the width of the connecting member 163I in the X axis direction is , And is longer than the connecting member 163G of the second embodiment.
- FIGS. 27A and 27B correspond to the states of FIGS. 17A and 17B in the second embodiment, respectively.
- the external transfer device 300 is moved in the -Z direction to place a new substrate P2 on the beam unit 152. Then, it is moved in the + X direction and exits the exposure apparatus 10I.
- the substrate loading hand 161I is moved in the + X direction, and enters under the beam unit 152 from the ⁇ X side (substrate holder 28G side). Then, the crotch portion of the finger portion 162I of the substrate loading hand 161I is stopped at a position not overlapping with the ⁇ X side end portion of the beam unit 152 in plan view.
- the stage device 20G that has finished the exposure process moves to the substrate delivery position with the port 150G.
- the substrate loading hand 161I is rotationally driven around the Y axis such that the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161I is substantially parallel to the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152.
- the beam unit 152 is moved downward (moved in the ⁇ Z direction) while holding the substrate P2, and stops at a position where a part of the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 contacts the substrate pick hand 167I of the substrate loading hand 161I.
- the substrate pick hand 167I sucks and holds the back surface of the substrate P2.
- the substrate P1 on the substrate holder 28G is offset in the + X direction by the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A.
- the substrate pick hand 167I of the substrate loading hand 161I is moved in the ⁇ X direction while holding the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152.
- the substrate P2 is moved onto the substrate loading hand 161I while being held by the substrate loading hand 161I and the beam unit 152.
- pressurized gas is ejected from the beam unit 152 and the substrate carry-out hand 161I. Since the substrate pick hand 167I holds the substrate P2 by suction, the substrate P2 does not fall from the beam unit 152 or the substrate carry-out hand 161I.
- the substrate loading hand 161I moves in the + Z direction with respect to the beam unit 152 to load the substrate P2 from the beam unit 152 onto the substrate loading hand 161I. There is less load on the substrate P2 than placement. Therefore, the risk of breakage of the substrate P2 can be reduced when the substrate P2 is transferred between the substrate loading hand 161I and the beam unit 152.
- the beam unit 152 is driven down to the lower side of the substrate loading hand 161I, and delivers the substrate P2 completely to the substrate loading hand 161I.
- the substrate loading hand 161I is rotationally driven around the Y axis, and the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161I is inclined relative to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28G. It will be in the state of FIG. 27 (b).
- the beam unit 152 is formed.
- Substrate P2 is transferred to the substrate loading hand 161I.
- the substrate P2 can be reliably delivered to the substrate loading hand 161I without bending.
- the width of the connecting member 163I in the X-axis direction is wide.
- the length of the finger portion 162I of the substrate loading hand 161I can be shortened, and the rigidity of the entire substrate loading hand 161I can be increased.
- the port 150J includes legs 154a and 154b whose upper ends are connected to the beam 153 of the beam unit 152.
- the port portion 150J includes Z actuators 158a and 158b which can extend and contract in the Z-axis direction independently of the legs 154a and 154b.
- the Z actuators 158a and 158b can change the tilt of the upper surface of the beam unit 152 by changing the amount of expansion and contraction of the legs 154a and 154b.
- the beam unit 152 disposed between the finger portions 162I1 at both ends and the inner finger portion 162I2 is illustrated.
- FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the substrate P2 is installed on the beam unit 152 by the external transfer device 300.
- the extension amounts of the legs 154a and 154b are changed by the Z actuators 158a and 158b, and the upper surface of the beam unit 152 is substantially the same as the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161I.
- the beam unit 152 is tilted to form.
- the substrate P2 held by the beam unit 152 is gripped by the substrate pick hand 167I with the lowering of the beam unit 152, and delivered to the substrate loading hand 161I while shifting the substrate position by the movement of the substrate pick hand 167I.
- the substrate P2 may be moved from the beam unit 152 to the substrate loading hand 161I by tilting the beam unit 152.
- the fourth modified example is an example in which the configuration of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand is changed.
- the substrate loading hand 161K according to the fourth modification has finger portions 162K of substantially the same length as the substrate dimension in the X-axis direction.
- the shape of the substrate loading hand 161K is shaped like a rhombus with sharpened both ends in a side view, and the arm 168 is located at a thick central portion. Is attached.
- the substrate loading hand 161K is disposed at a position where the crotch of the finger 162K does not overlap with the ⁇ X side end of the beam unit 152 in plan view.
- the beam unit 152 is moved in the -Z direction as shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b). Since the length of the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K is substantially the same as the length of the substrate P2, the substrate P2 is placed on the substrate loading hand 161K by the movement of the beam unit 152 in the ⁇ Z axial direction. Thereafter, the substrate P2 is slid to the slope side by the substrate pick hand 167K. As a result, a part of the substrate P2 is inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28G. The subsequent operations will not be described in detail, being substantially the same as in the second embodiment.
- the substrate P2 placed on the beam unit 152 is In the case of receiving by the substrate loading hand 161K, the substrate P2 can be scooped only by passing the substrate loading hand 161K from the bottom to the top of the beam unit 152. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation is simple and damage to the substrate P2 and dust generation hardly occur.
- the fifth modified example is an example in which a substrate is directly delivered from the external transfer device 300 to the substrate loading hand 161K.
- the forks of the external transfer device 300 are arranged such that the position in the Y-axis direction of the substrate loading hand 161K and the finger portion 162K do not overlap in plan view.
- the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 is disposed so as not to overlap with the fork of the external transfer device 300 in plan view.
- the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K and the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 are disposed at overlapping positions in plan view.
- the substrate loading hand 161K is driven in the + X direction so as to be disposed at a substrate delivery position with the external transfer device 300.
- the external transfer device 300 is moved in the ⁇ X direction until reaching the substrate delivery position with the substrate loading hand 161K while holding the substrate P2.
- the stage device 20G which has completed the exposure process moves to the substrate delivery position with the beam unit 152.
- the substrate P1 on the substrate holder 28G is offset in the + X direction by the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A.
- the lower surface of the substrate P2 contacts the substrate pick hand 167K.
- the substrate pick hand 167K sucks and holds the lower surface of the substrate P2.
- the substrate pick hand 167K holding the lower surface of the substrate P2 by suction is driven in the ⁇ X direction.
- the substrate P2 on the external transfer device 300 is moved to the substrate loading hand 161K.
- the external transfer device 300 is driven to descend as it is and completely transfers the substrate P2 onto the substrate loading hand 161K, the external transfer device 300 is driven in the + X direction to withdraw from the inside of the exposure device 10L.
- the beam unit 152 is moved in the ⁇ Z direction and the ⁇ X direction, and travels to the substrate delivery position with the stage device 20G.
- the substrate loading hand 161K can directly receive the substrate P2 from the external transfer device 300 without passing through the port portion 150G.
- the substrate loading hand 161K since only one delivery of the delivery from the transfer apparatus 300 to the substrate loading hand 161K is sufficient and the number of times of delivery of the substrate P2 is reduced, shortening of the time taken for loading the substrate P2 and prevention of damage and dusting of the substrate P2 Can.
- the substrate P1 is transferred from the beam unit 152 to the external transfer apparatus 300 as in the second embodiment for the recovery (unloading) of the substrate P1.
- the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 and the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K do not overlap so that the beam unit 152 and the finger portion of the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 do not overlap in plan view.
- positions so that it may overlap in planar view it is not restricted to this.
- the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 and the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K may not overlap in plan view.
- the beam unit 152 may be shifted by one finger portion 162K in the Y-axis direction. Thereby, the substrate carried out from the substrate holder 28G to the port portion 150G can be again scooped by the substrate carrying hand.
- the external transfer device 300 When transferring the substrate, the external transfer device 300 is shifted in the Y-axis direction, not the beam unit 152 is shifted in the Y-axis direction so that the beam 153 does not overlap with the finger portion 162K in plan view.
- the substrate loading hand 161K may be shifted in the Y-axis direction.
- the sixth modification is the one in which the configuration of the substrate loading hand is changed.
- FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing a substrate loading hand 161L according to the sixth modification.
- the substrate loading hand 161L has a plate portion 263 having a triangular XZ cross section, and an arm portion 265 supporting the plate portion 263.
- the upper surface of the plate portion 263 is inclined with respect to the XY plane.
- the substrate loading hand may not have a finger. That is, the substrate loading hand may not have a fork shape.
- the upper surface of the plate portion 263 of the substrate loading hand 161L may be curved.
- the section coefficient of the substrate can be increased. That is, the same effect can be obtained as the thickness of the substrate becomes several to several hundreds times larger than the actual thickness with respect to the deflection of the substrate.
- the substrate P even if the substrate P is placed on the substrate carry-in hand 161L in a state where the -X end protrudes, it bends (drops) at the -X end of the substrate P. Can be suppressed.
- the substrate P since generation of bending (drooping) of the substrate P is suppressed, the substrate P can be brought into contact from the central portion in the Y-axis direction of the side on the ⁇ X side when the substrate P is brought into contact with the substrate holder. This makes it possible to make wrinkles less likely to occur at the -X end of the substrate P.
- the substrate transport units 160A to 160L may be provided with a cover 199.
- the cover 199 By providing the cover 199, adhesion of dust to the substrate P can be prevented, and the temperature of the substrate P can be made constant.
- the stage device 20A according to the first embodiment may be used instead of the stage device 20G. Further, the stage device 20G may be applied to the first embodiment and its modification.
- FIG. 39 shows the vicinity of the + X side end portion of the surface plate 30 called the upper column, which supports the projection optical system 16 and the mask stage 14 etc. And (c) partially chamfering (30a) so as not to interfere with the substrate loading hand.
- FIG. 39 shows the case in which the substrate loading hand is the substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment. Thereby, the height of the entire exposure apparatus can be reduced.
- the stage devices 20A and 20G are the substrate position measuring devices as the substrate position measuring device described above.
- the CCD cameras 31x and 31y image processing edge detection for detecting an edge are provided.
- the CCD cameras 31x are arranged so that two sides on the -X side of the substrate P before being placed on the substrate holders 28A and 28G can be observed.
- the CCD camera 31y is arranged such that one of the sides on the ⁇ Y side (or the + Y side) of the substrate P can be observed from below. Thereby, the X position, the Y position, and the ⁇ z position of the substrate P relative to the stage devices 20A and 20G can be known.
- the edge of the substrate P may not be detected by the CCD cameras 31x and 31y.
- a known edge sensor including a light source and a light receiving unit may be used.
- the light source is disposed at the same position as the CCD cameras 31x and 31y, and the light receiving unit is disposed so as to face the light source with the substrate P interposed therebetween.
- the cross section orthogonal to the optical axis of the measurement light emitted from the light source is linear, and the light receiving unit detects the end of the substrate P by receiving the measurement light.
- the X position, Y position, and ⁇ z position of the substrate P with respect to the stage devices 20A and 20G are detected You may do it.
- stage device 20M shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c) may be used.
- the substrate loading bearer device 182M is provided in two places at the -X side end of the substrate holder 28M. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the substrate loading bearer device 182M has a part on the notch 28a formed at the end of the substrate holder 28M on the -X side.
- the height is set to be substantially the same height as the upper surface of the substrate holder 28M. Therefore, even after the substrate P2 is placed, the holding pad 184a does not have to move in the ⁇ X direction and be retracted from the substrate holder 28M.
- the substrate carry-in bearer device 182M can be inclined so that the back surface of the substrate P2 carried in obliquely can be suctioned and fixed with certainty. Further, the substrate loading bearer device 182M can move in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction or the X-axis and Y-axis directions) so that relative position adjustment (alignment) of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28M can be performed.
- the holding pad 184a can be inclined, the back surface of the substrate P2 can be reliably suctioned and fixed.
- stage device 20N shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) may be used.
- the stage device 20N does not have the substrate loading bearer device which moves independently and which is described in the first and second embodiments.
- the substrate is carried in at one or more locations near the -X side end face of the substrate holder so that a part of the upper surface of the substrate holder 28N also serves as a holding pad 184a that suctions and holds the leading end of the carried-in substrate.
- An adsorption area (bearer area) 187 is provided for adsorbing and holding the tip of the head.
- the relative position adjustment (alignment) of the loaded substrate P with respect to the substrate holder 28N can not be performed by the substrate loading bearer device.
- the position adjustment of the substrate P may be performed on the substrate carry-in hand using the pair of substrate carry-out hands before suctioning the substrate at step S2. If it is desired to perform relative position adjustment (alignment) of the substrate P with respect to the substrate holder 28N after placing the substrate P on the substrate holder 28N, the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A may be used.
- the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from between the substrate P and the substrate holder 28N.
- the substrate holder 28N absorbs the air to suck the substrate P2 onto the holder substrate holding surface, thereby stably carrying in the substrate P2.
- the support pad on the finger of the substrate loading hand may be omitted.
- the same magnification system is used as the projection optical system 16.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- the application of the exposure apparatus is not limited to an exposure apparatus for liquid crystal that transfers a liquid crystal display element pattern to a square glass plate, and for example, an exposure apparatus for manufacturing an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) panel, for semiconductor manufacturing
- the present invention can be widely applied to an exposure apparatus for producing an exposure apparatus, a thin film magnetic head, a micromachine, a DNA chip, etc.
- an exposure apparatus for producing an exposure apparatus a thin film magnetic head, a micromachine, a DNA chip, etc.
- micro devices such as semiconductor devices but also masks or reticles used in light exposure devices, EUV exposure devices, X-ray exposure devices, electron beam exposure devices, etc., glass substrates or silicon wafers etc.
- the substrate to be exposed is not limited to the glass plate, but may be another object such as a wafer, a ceramic substrate, a film member, or a mask blank.
- the thickness of the substrate is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, a film (a sheet-like member having flexibility). Note that the exposure apparatus of the present embodiment is particularly effective when a substrate having a side length or a diagonal length of 500 mm or more is an exposure target.
- the substrate to be exposed is in the form of a flexible sheet, the sheet may be formed in a roll.
- ⁇ Device manufacturing method a method of manufacturing a microdevice using the exposure apparatuses 10A to 10L according to the above-described embodiments in the lithography process will be described.
- liquid crystal display elements as microdevices can be obtained by forming predetermined patterns (circuit patterns, electrode patterns, etc.) on a substrate.
- ⁇ Pattern formation process First, a so-called photolithographic process of forming a pattern image on a photosensitive substrate (such as a glass substrate coated with a resist) is performed using the exposure apparatus according to each of the above-described embodiments.
- a predetermined pattern including a large number of electrodes and the like is formed on the photosensitive substrate. Thereafter, the exposed substrate is subjected to steps such as a developing step, an etching step and a resist removing step to form a predetermined pattern on the substrate.
- steps such as a developing step, an etching step and a resist removing step to form a predetermined pattern on the substrate.
- a set of three stripes corresponding to R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue) are arranged in a large number in a matrix, or a set of three stripe filters of R, G, B Form color filters arranged in the direction of a plurality of horizontal scanning lines.
- a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell) is assembled using the substrate having the predetermined pattern obtained in the pattern forming step, the color filter obtained in the color filter forming step, and the like.
- a liquid crystal is injected between a substrate having a predetermined pattern obtained in the pattern formation step and a color filter obtained in the color filter formation step to manufacture a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell).
- ⁇ Module assembly process> Thereafter, components such as an electric circuit for performing a display operation of the assembled liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell) and a backlight are attached to complete the liquid crystal display element.
- the exposure of the substrate is performed with high throughput and high accuracy using the exposure apparatus according to each of the above-described embodiments.
- the productivity of the liquid crystal display element can be improved.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
- Container, Conveyance, Adherence, Positioning, Of Wafer (AREA)
- Exposure Of Semiconductors, Excluding Electron Or Ion Beam Exposure (AREA)
Abstract
In order to shorten the time required for substrate replacement, this substrate handling device (100A) which conveys a substrate (P2) to the holding surface (TS) of a holding device comprises: a first holding portion (161A) which holds the substrate (P2) above the holding device; a second holding portion (184a) which holds part of the substrate (P2) held by the first holding portion (161A); and a drive unit (164) which moves the holding device, the second holding portion (184a) and the first holding portion (161A) relative to one another in a predetermined direction along the holding surface, in such a manner that the first holding portion (161A) is retracted from above the holding device. While the first holding portion (161A) is undergoing relative movement caused by the drive unit (164), the substrate (P2) is held in such a manner that the position in the vertical direction of the region of the substrate (P2) which is held by the first holding portion (161A) approaches the holding device.
Description
本発明は、基板搬送装置、露光装置、フラットパネルディスプレイの製造方法、デバイス製造方法、基板搬送方法、及び露光方法に関する。
The present invention relates to a substrate transfer apparatus, an exposure apparatus, a method of manufacturing a flat panel display, a device manufacturing method, a substrate transfer method, and an exposure method.
液晶表示素子、半導体素子等の電子デバイスを製造するリソグラフィ工程では、マスク(又はレチクル)に形成されたパターンを、エネルギビームを用いて基板(ガラス又はプラスチック等からなる基板、半導体ウエハ等)上に転写する露光装置が用いられている。
In a lithography process for manufacturing an electronic device such as a liquid crystal display element or a semiconductor element, a pattern formed on a mask (or reticle) is transferred onto a substrate (substrate made of glass or plastic, semiconductor wafer etc.) using an energy beam. An exposure apparatus for transferring is used.
この種の露光装置においては、基板を保持するステージ装置上の露光済みの基板の搬出、及び新たな基板のステージ装置上への搬入が行われる。基板の搬送方法としては、例えば、特許文献1に記載の方法が知られている。
In this type of exposure apparatus, unloading of the exposed substrate on the stage device holding the substrate and loading of a new substrate onto the stage device are performed. As a method of transporting a substrate, for example, a method described in Patent Document 1 is known.
第1の態様によれば、基板を保持装置の保持面に搬送する基板搬送装置において、前記保持装置の上方で前記基板を保持する第1保持部と、前記第1保持部に保持された前記基板の一部を保持する第2保持部と、前記第1保持部が前記保持装置の上方から退避されるように、前記保持装置及び前記第2保持部と前記第1保持部とを、前記保持面に沿う所定方向へ相対移動させる駆動部と、を備え、前記第1保持部は、前記駆動部による相対移動中に、前記基板のうち前記第1保持部に保持された領域の上下方向の位置が前記保持装置に近づくよう、前記基板を保持する基板搬送装置が提供される。
According to a first aspect, in a substrate transfer apparatus for transferring a substrate to a holding surface of a holding apparatus, a first holding unit holding the substrate above the holding apparatus, and the first holding unit holding the substrate A second holding unit for holding a portion of the substrate; and the holding device, the second holding unit, and the first holding unit such that the first holding unit is retracted from above the holding device. And a driving unit configured to relatively move in a predetermined direction along the holding surface, wherein the first holding unit is a vertical direction of an area of the substrate held by the first holding unit during relative movement by the driving unit. A substrate transport apparatus is provided for holding the substrate such that the position of the substrate approaches the holding apparatus.
第2の態様によれば、上記の基板搬送装置と、前記保持装置へ搬送された前記基板に対してエネルギビームを照射し、前記基板を露光する光学系と、を備える露光装置が提供される。
According to a second aspect, there is provided an exposure apparatus comprising: the substrate transfer apparatus described above; and an optical system which irradiates an energy beam to the substrate transferred to the holding apparatus to expose the substrate. .
第3の態様によれば、上記の露光装置を用いて基板を露光することと、前記露光された前記基板を現像することと、を含むフラットパネルディスプレイ製造方法が提供される。
According to a third aspect, there is provided a method of manufacturing a flat panel display, comprising: exposing a substrate using the exposure apparatus described above; and developing the exposed substrate.
第4の態様によれば、上記の露光装置を用いて基板を露光することと、前記露光された前記基板を現像することと、を含むデバイス製造方法が提供される。
According to a fourth aspect, there is provided a device manufacturing method comprising: exposing a substrate using the exposure apparatus described above; and developing the exposed substrate.
第5の態様によれば、基板を保持装置の保持面に搬送する基板搬送方法において、前記保持装置の上方で第1保持部と第2保持部とにより基板を保持することと、前記第1保持部が前記保持装置の上方から退避されるように、前記保持装置及び前記第2保持部と前記第1保持部とを、前記保持面に沿う所定方向へ相対移動させることと、を含み、前記保持することでは、相対移動中に、前記基板のうち前記第1保持部に保持された領域の上下方向の位置が前記保持装置に近づくよう、前記第1保持部が前記基板を保持する基板搬送方法が提供される。
According to a fifth aspect, in a substrate transfer method for transferring a substrate to a holding surface of a holding device, holding the substrate by the first holding portion and the second holding portion above the holding device; And relatively moving the holding device, the second holding portion, and the first holding portion in a predetermined direction along the holding surface such that the holding portion is retracted from above the holding device. In the holding, the substrate on which the first holding unit holds the substrate so that the vertical position of the region of the substrate held by the first holding unit approaches the holding device during relative movement. A method of delivery is provided.
第6の態様によれば、上記の基板搬送方法により、前記基板を前記保持装置へ搬送することと、前記基板に対してエネルギビームを照射し、前記基板を露光することと、を含む露光方法が提供される。
According to a sixth aspect, there is provided an exposure method comprising: transporting the substrate to the holding device by the above substrate transporting method; and irradiating the substrate with an energy beam to expose the substrate. Is provided.
第7の態様によれば、上記の露光方法を用いて前記基板を露光することと、前記露光された前記基板を現像することと、を含むフラットパネルディスプレイ製造方法が提供される。
According to a seventh aspect, there is provided a method of manufacturing a flat panel display, comprising: exposing the substrate using the above-described exposure method; and developing the exposed substrate.
第8の態様によれば、上記の露光方法を用いて前記基板を露光することと、前記露光された前記基板を現像することと、を含むデバイス製造方法が提供される。
According to an eighth aspect, there is provided a device manufacturing method comprising: exposing the substrate using the above-described exposure method; and developing the exposed substrate.
なお、後述の実施形態の構成を適宜改良しても良く、また、少なくとも一部を他の構成物に代替させても良い。更に、その配置について特に限定のない構成要件は、実施形態で開示した配置に限らず、その機能を達成できる位置に配置することができる。
In addition, you may improve suitably the structure of the below-mentioned embodiment, and may substitute at least one part by another structure. Furthermore, the configuration requirements without particular limitation on the arrangement are not limited to the arrangements disclosed in the embodiments, and can be arranged at positions where the functions can be achieved.
≪第1実施形態≫
まず、本発明にかかる第1実施形態について、図1~図8(c)に基づいて説明する。 First Embodiment
First, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on FIGS. 1 to 8 (c).
まず、本発明にかかる第1実施形態について、図1~図8(c)に基づいて説明する。 First Embodiment
First, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on FIGS. 1 to 8 (c).
図1には、第1実施形態に係る露光装置10Aの構成が概略的に示されている。また、図2は、図1の露光装置10A(一部省略)が有するステージ装置20A及び基板搬送装置100Aの平面図である。また、図3(a)はステージ装置20Aの平面図であり、図3(b)はステージ装置20Aの側面図であり、図3(c)は図3(a)のA-A断面図である。
FIG. 1 schematically shows the arrangement of an exposure apparatus 10A according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a plan view of a stage device 20A and a substrate transfer device 100A which the exposure apparatus 10A (partially omitted) of FIG. 1 has. 3 (a) is a plan view of the stage device 20A, FIG. 3 (b) is a side view of the stage device 20A, and FIG. 3 (c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 3 (a). is there.
露光装置10Aは、例えば液晶表示装置(フラットパネルディスプレイ)などに用いられる矩形(角型)のガラス基板P(以下、単に基板Pと称する)を露光対象物とするステップ・アンド・スキャン方式の投影露光装置、いわゆるスキャナである。
The exposure apparatus 10A is, for example, a projection of a step-and-scan method in which a rectangular (square) glass substrate P (hereinafter simply referred to as a substrate P) used for a liquid crystal display (flat panel display) or the like is an exposure object The exposure apparatus is a so-called scanner.
図1に示すように、露光装置10Aは、照明系12、回路パターン等のパターンが形成されたマスクMを保持するマスクステージ14、投影光学系16、表面(図1で+Z側を向いた面)にレジスト(感応剤)が塗布された基板Pを保持するステージ装置20A、基板搬送装置100A、及びこれらの制御系等を有している。以下、図1に示すように、露光装置10Aに対して互いに直交するX軸、Y軸及びZ軸を設定し、露光時にマスクMと基板Pとが投影光学系16に対してそれぞれX軸方向に沿って相対走査されるものとし、Y軸が水平面内に設定されているものとして説明を行う。また、X軸、Y軸、及びZ軸回りの回転(傾斜)方向をそれぞれθx、θy、及びθz方向として説明を行う。また、X軸、Y軸、及びZ軸方向に関する位置をそれぞれX位置、Y位置、及びZ位置として説明を行う。
As shown in FIG. 1, the exposure apparatus 10A includes an illumination system 12, a mask stage 14 holding a mask M on which a pattern such as a circuit pattern is formed, a projection optical system 16, and a surface (a surface facing the + Z side in FIG. ), A stage apparatus 20A for holding a substrate P coated with a resist (sensitive agent), a substrate transfer apparatus 100A, and a control system of these. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 1, the X axis, Y axis and Z axis orthogonal to each other are set with respect to the exposure apparatus 10A, and the mask M and the substrate P with respect to the projection optical system 16 at the time of exposure In the following description, it is assumed that relative scanning is performed along the Y axis and the Y axis is set in the horizontal plane. Further, the rotational (inclination) directions about the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis will be described as θx, θy, and θz directions, respectively. Further, positions in the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis directions will be described as X position, Y position, and Z position, respectively.
照明系12は、例えば米国特許第5,729,331号明細書などに開示される照明系と同様に構成され、露光用照明光(照明光)ILをマスクMに照射する。照明光ILとしては、例えばi線(波長365nm)、g線(波長436nm)、h線(波長405nm)のうち少なくとも1つの波長を含む光が用いられる。また、照明系12で用いられる光源、及び該光源から照射される照明光ILの波長は、特に限定されず、例えばArFエキシマレーザ光(波長193nm)、KrFエキシマレーザ光(波長248nm)などの紫外光や、F2レーザ光(波長157nm)などの真空紫外光であっても良い。
The illumination system 12 is configured in the same manner as the illumination system disclosed in, for example, US Pat. No. 5,729,331, and illuminates the mask M with illumination light for illumination (illumination light) IL. As the illumination light IL, for example, light including at least one wavelength of i-line (wavelength 365 nm), g-line (wavelength 436 nm) and h-line (wavelength 405 nm) is used. Further, the light source used in the illumination system 12 and the wavelength of the illumination light IL irradiated from the light source are not particularly limited. For example, ultraviolet light such as ArF excimer laser light (wavelength 193 nm) or KrF excimer laser light (wavelength 248 nm) It may be light or vacuum ultraviolet light such as F2 laser light (wavelength 157 nm).
マスクステージ14は、光透過型のマスクMを保持している。マスクステージ14は、例えばリニアモータを含むマスクステージ駆動系(不図示)により、少なくとも走査方向(X軸方向)に所定のストロークで駆動される。またマスクステージ14は、照明系12、ステージ装置20A、投影光学系16の少なくともいずれかとの相対位置を調整するために、そのX位置やY位置をストロークで移動させる微動駆動系により駆動される。マスクステージ14の位置情報は、例えば、リニアエンコーダシステムや干渉計システムを含むマスクステージ位置計測系(不図示)により求められる。
The mask stage 14 holds a light transmission type mask M. The mask stage 14 is driven at a predetermined stroke at least in the scanning direction (X-axis direction) by a mask stage drive system (not shown) including, for example, a linear motor. Further, the mask stage 14 is driven by a fine movement drive system that moves the X position and the Y position with a stroke in order to adjust the relative position to at least one of the illumination system 12, the stage device 20 A, and the projection optical system 16. Position information of the mask stage 14 is obtained by, for example, a mask stage position measurement system (not shown) including a linear encoder system and an interferometer system.
投影光学系16は、マスクステージ14の下方に配置されている。投影光学系16は、例えば米国特許第6,552,775号明細書などに開示される投影光学系と同様な構成の、いわゆるマルチレンズ型の投影光学系であり、例えば正立正像を形成する両側テレセントリックな複数の光学系を備えている。なお、投影光学系16は、マルチレンズ型でなくてもよい。半導体露光装置に用いられるような、一つの投影光学系により構成されていてもよい。
The projection optical system 16 is disposed below the mask stage 14. The projection optical system 16 is a so-called multi-lens type projection optical system having the same configuration as that of the projection optical system disclosed in, for example, US Pat. No. 6,552,775, and forms, for example, an erecting image. It has multiple optical systems that are both telecentric. The projection optical system 16 may not be a multi-lens type. It may be configured by one projection optical system as used in a semiconductor exposure apparatus.
露光装置10Aでは、照明系12からの照明光ILによる所定の照明領域内に位置するマスクMが照明されると、その照明領域内のマスクMのパターンの投影像(部分的なパターンの像)が投影光学系16によっての露光領域に形成される。そして、照明領域(照明光IL)に対してマスクMが走査方向に相対移動するとともに、露光領域に対して基板Pが走査方向に相対移動することで、基板P上に走査露光が行われ、マスクMに形成されたパターン(マスクMの走査範囲に対応するパターン全体)が転写される。
In the exposure apparatus 10A, when the mask M located in a predetermined illumination area by the illumination light IL from the illumination system 12 is illuminated, a projection image (a partial pattern image) of the pattern of the mask M in the illumination area Is formed in the exposure area by the projection optical system 16. Then, the mask M moves relative to the illumination area (illumination light IL) in the scanning direction, and the substrate P moves relative to the exposure area in the scanning direction, whereby scanning exposure is performed on the substrate P. The pattern formed on the mask M (the entire pattern corresponding to the scanning range of the mask M) is transferred.
(ステージ装置20A)
ステージ装置20Aは、定盤22、基板テーブル24、支持装置26、及び基板ホルダ28Aを備えている。 (Stage device 20A)
Thestage device 20A includes a platen 22, a substrate table 24, a support device 26, and a substrate holder 28A.
ステージ装置20Aは、定盤22、基板テーブル24、支持装置26、及び基板ホルダ28Aを備えている。 (
The
定盤22は、上面(+Z面)がXY平面に平行となるように配置された平面視(+Z側から見て)矩形の板状の部材から成り、不図示の防振装置を介して床F上に設置されている。支持装置26は、定盤22上に非接触状態で載置され、基板テーブル24を下方から非接触で支持している。基板ホルダ28Aは基板テーブル24上に配置され、基板テーブル24と基板ホルダ28Aとは、ステージ装置20Aが備える不図示のステージ駆動系により一体的に駆動される。ステージ駆動系は、例えばリニアモータなどを含み、基板テーブル24をX軸、及びY軸方向に(定盤22の上面に沿って)所定のストロークで駆動可能な粗動系と、例えばボイスコイルモーターを含み、基板テーブル24を6自由度(X軸、Y軸、Z軸、θx、θy、及びθz)方向に微小駆動する微動系とを備える。また、ステージ装置20Aは、例えば光干渉計システムやエンコーダシステムなどを含み、基板テーブル24の上記6自由度方向の位置情報を求めるためのステージ計測系を備えている。
The surface plate 22 is formed of a rectangular plate-like member in plan view (as viewed from the + Z side) arranged such that the upper surface (+ Z surface) is parallel to the XY plane, and the floor is provided via a vibration isolation device (not shown) It is installed on F. The support device 26 is mounted on the surface plate 22 in a non-contact manner, and supports the substrate table 24 from the lower side in a non-contact manner. The substrate holder 28A is disposed on the substrate table 24, and the substrate table 24 and the substrate holder 28A are integrally driven by a stage driving system (not shown) provided in the stage device 20A. The stage drive system includes, for example, a linear motor, and a coarse movement system capable of driving the substrate table 24 in a predetermined stroke in the X-axis and Y-axis directions (along the upper surface of the platen 22); And a micromotion system for minutely driving the substrate table 24 in six degrees of freedom (X axis, Y axis, Z axis, .theta.x, .theta.y, and .theta.z). In addition, the stage device 20A includes, for example, an optical interferometer system, an encoder system, and the like, and includes a stage measurement system for obtaining positional information in the direction of the six degrees of freedom of the substrate table 24.
図3(a)に示すように、基板ホルダ28Aは、平面視矩形状の上面TS(+Z側の面)に基板Pが載置される。上面TSは、その縦横比が基板Pとほぼ同じである。一例として、上面TSの長辺及び短辺の長さは、基板Pの長辺及び短辺の長さに対して、それぞれ幾分短く設定されている。
As shown to Fig.3 (a), the board | substrate P is mounted in the upper surface TS (surface by the side of + Z) of the substrate holder 28A rectangular shape in planar view. The aspect ratio of the upper surface TS is substantially the same as that of the substrate P. As an example, the lengths of the long side and the short side of the upper surface TS are set somewhat shorter than the lengths of the long side and the short side of the substrate P, respectively.
基板ホルダ28Aの上面TSは、全面に渡って平坦に仕上げられている。また、基板ホルダ28Aの上面には、空気吹き出し用の微小な孔部(不図示)、真空吸引用の微小な孔部(不図示)が複数形成されている。なお、空気吹き出し用の微小な孔部と真空吸引用の微小な孔部とは、共通の孔部を併用してもよい。基板ホルダ28Aは、不図示のバキューム装置から供給される真空吸引力を用いて、上記複数の孔部を介して、上面と基板Pとの間の空気を吸引し、上面TSに基板Pを吸着させる(平面矯正する)ことが可能である。基板ホルダ28Aは、いわゆるピンチャック型のホルダであって、複数のピン(直径が、例えば直径1mm程度と非常に小さいピン)がほぼ均等な間隔で配置されている。基板ホルダ28Aは、この複数のピンを有することで、基板Pの裏面にゴミや異物を挟み込んで支持する可能性を低減でき、その異物の挟み込みによる基板Pの変形の可能性が低減できる。基板Pは、複数のピンの上面に保持(支持)される。この複数のピンの上面により形成されるXY平面を、基板ホルダ28Aの上面とする。また、基板ホルダ28Aは、不図示の加圧気体供給装置から供給される加圧気体(例えば空気)を、上記孔部を介して上面TSと基板Pとの間に供給(給気)することによって、基板ホルダ28Aに吸着された基板Pの裏面を上面TSに対して離間(基板Pを浮上)させることが可能である。また、基板ホルダ28Aに形成された複数の孔部のそれぞれで、加圧気体を給気するタイミングに時間差を生じさせたり、真空吸引を行う孔部と加圧気体を給気気する孔部の場所を適宜交換したり、吸引と給気とで空気圧力を適宜変化させたりすることによって、基板Pの接地状態を制御(例えば、基板Pの裏面と基板ホルダ28Aの上面との間に空気溜まりが発生しないように)できる。
The upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A is finished flat over the entire surface. Further, on the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A, a plurality of minute holes (not shown) for blowing air and a plurality of small holes (not shown) for vacuum suction are formed. Note that the minute holes for blowing air and the small holes for vacuum suction may use a common hole in combination. The substrate holder 28A sucks the air between the upper surface and the substrate P through the plurality of holes using the vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown), and adsorbs the substrate P on the upper surface TS. It is possible to make it (flatten). The substrate holder 28A is a so-called pin chuck type holder, and a plurality of pins (a pin whose diameter is very small, for example, about 1 mm in diameter) are arranged at substantially equal intervals. By having the plurality of pins, the substrate holder 28A can reduce the possibility of holding and supporting dust and foreign matter on the back surface of the substrate P, and can reduce the possibility of deformation of the substrate P due to the holding of the foreign matter. The substrate P is held (supported) on the top surfaces of the plurality of pins. The XY plane formed by the upper surfaces of the plurality of pins is taken as the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A. In addition, the substrate holder 28A supplies (charges) pressurized gas (for example, air) supplied from a pressurized gas supply device (not shown) between the upper surface TS and the substrate P via the holes. Thus, the back surface of the substrate P adsorbed to the substrate holder 28A can be separated from the top surface TS (the substrate P is floated). In each of the plurality of holes formed in the substrate holder 28A, a time difference occurs in the timing of supplying pressurized gas, or a hole for performing vacuum suction and a hole for supplying pressurized gas. Control the ground state of the substrate P by changing the location appropriately or changing the air pressure appropriately by suction and air supply (for example, an air pool between the back surface of the substrate P and the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A So that it does not occur).
なお、基板ホルダ28Aは、基板を上面TSに吸着させず、浮上支持した状態で基板の平面矯正を行うようにしても良い。この場合、基板ホルダ28Aは、不図示の加圧気体供給装置から供給される加圧気体(例えば空気)を、上記孔部を介して基板Pの裏面に供給(給気)することによって、基板Pの下面と基板ホルダ28Aの上面との間に気体を介在させる(すなわち、気体膜を形成する)。また、基板ホルダ28Aは、真空吸引装置を用いて、真空吸引用の孔部を介して基板ホルダ28Aと基板Pとの間の気体を吸引し、基板Pに対して重力方向下向きの力(プリロード)を作用させることにより、上記気体膜に重力方向の剛性を付与する。そして、基板ホルダ28Aは、加圧気体の圧力及び流量と真空吸引力とのバランスにより、基板PをZ軸方向に微小なクリアランスを介して浮上させて非接触で保持(支持)しつつ、基板Pに対してその平面度を制御する力(例えば、平面度を矯正または補正する力)を作用させるようにしてもよい。なお、各孔部は基板ホルダ28Aを加工して形成してもよいし、多孔質材により基板ホルダ28Aを形成することで、空気を供給したり、吸引したりするようにしてもよい。また、基板Pを浮上支持する基板ホルダ28Aにおける、上面TSは、孔部が形成される面ではなく、その面から上記のクリアランス分上方に位置する仮想面、つまり、平面矯正された基板の下面を、上面TSとする。
The substrate holder 28A may perform surface correction of the substrate in a state where the substrate is floated and supported without attracting the substrate to the upper surface TS. In this case, the substrate holder 28A supplies (charges) the pressurized gas (for example, air) supplied from the pressurized gas supply device (not shown) to the back surface of the substrate P through the holes, thereby the substrate A gas is interposed between the lower surface of P and the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A (ie, a gas film is formed). Further, the substrate holder 28A sucks the gas between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P through the hole for vacuum suction using a vacuum suction device, and a force (preload in the direction of gravity downward with respect to the substrate P The above-mentioned gas film is given rigidity in the direction of gravity by acting. Then, the substrate holder 28A floats the substrate P in the Z-axis direction through a minute clearance and holds (supports) the substrate P in a non-contact manner by the balance between the pressure and flow rate of the pressurized gas and the vacuum suction force. A force for controlling the flatness (for example, a force for correcting or correcting the flatness) may be applied to P. Each hole may be formed by processing the substrate holder 28A, or air may be supplied or suctioned by forming the substrate holder 28A with a porous material. Further, in the substrate holder 28A for floatingly supporting the substrate P, the upper surface TS is not the surface on which the hole portion is formed, but a virtual surface located above the clearance from the surface, that is, the lower surface of the substrate corrected in plane. Is the upper surface TS.
また、図3(a)に示すように、基板ホルダ28Aの上面TSにおける+X側の端部には、例えば2つの切り欠き28bがY軸方向に離間して形成されている。図3(c)に示すように、切り欠き28bは、基板ホルダ28Aの上面TS及び+X側の側面にそれぞれ開口している。
Further, as shown in FIG. 3A, for example, two notches 28b are formed apart in the Y-axis direction at the end on the + X side of the top surface TS of the substrate holder 28A. As shown in FIG. 3C, the notches 28b are respectively opened on the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A and the side surface on the + X side.
(基板搬送装置100A)
図1に示すように、基板搬送装置100Aは、ポート部150A、基板搬送部160A、及び搬送装置180Aを有している。ポート部150A及び基板搬送部160Aは、ステージ装置20Aに対して+X側に設置されている。例えば、コータ/デベロッパなどの外部装置(不図示)と露光装置との間における基板Pの受け渡しは、基板搬送装置100Aによって行われる。基板搬送部160Aは、基板ホルダ28Aからポート部150Aへ露光済みの基板P(P1)を搬送し、ポート部150Aから基板ホルダ28Aへ新たに露光する基板P(P2)を搬送するためのものである。なお、基板P2は、未露光(1度も露光されていない)基板であってもよいし、2度目以降の露光を行う基板であってもよい。 (Substrate transfer apparatus 100A)
As shown in FIG. 1, thesubstrate transfer apparatus 100A includes a port unit 150A, a substrate transfer unit 160A, and a transfer device 180A. The port unit 150A and the substrate transfer unit 160A are installed on the + X side with respect to the stage device 20A. For example, delivery of the substrate P between an external apparatus (not shown) such as a coater / developer and the like and the exposure apparatus is performed by the substrate transfer apparatus 100A. The substrate transfer unit 160A transfers the exposed substrate P (P1) from the substrate holder 28A to the port unit 150A and transfers the substrate P (P2) to be newly exposed from the port unit 150A to the substrate holder 28A. is there. The substrate P2 may be a non-exposed (not exposed once) substrate, or may be a substrate on which the second and subsequent exposures are performed.
図1に示すように、基板搬送装置100Aは、ポート部150A、基板搬送部160A、及び搬送装置180Aを有している。ポート部150A及び基板搬送部160Aは、ステージ装置20Aに対して+X側に設置されている。例えば、コータ/デベロッパなどの外部装置(不図示)と露光装置との間における基板Pの受け渡しは、基板搬送装置100Aによって行われる。基板搬送部160Aは、基板ホルダ28Aからポート部150Aへ露光済みの基板P(P1)を搬送し、ポート部150Aから基板ホルダ28Aへ新たに露光する基板P(P2)を搬送するためのものである。なお、基板P2は、未露光(1度も露光されていない)基板であってもよいし、2度目以降の露光を行う基板であってもよい。 (
As shown in FIG. 1, the
また、上述の外部装置と露光装置10Aとの間における基板Pの受け渡しは、照明系12、マスクステージ14、投影光学系16、ステージ装置20A、基板搬送装置100Aなどを収容する不図示のチャンバの外側に配置された外部搬送装置300により行われる。外部搬送装置300は、フォーク状のロボットハンドを有しており、載置された基板Pを外部装置から露光装置10A内のポート部150Aへ運ぶことができる。そして、先述したとおり、基板搬送部160Aは、基板Pをポート部150Aから基板ホルダ28Aへ搬送する。外部搬送装置300は、基板搬送装置100Aによりポート部150Aへ搬送された露光済み基板Pをチャンバ内から外部装置へ運ぶことができる。
Further, delivery of the substrate P between the above-described external apparatus and the exposure apparatus 10A is performed by using a chamber (not shown) that accommodates the illumination system 12, the mask stage 14, the projection optical system 16, the stage apparatus 20A, the substrate transfer apparatus 100A and the like This is performed by the external transfer device 300 disposed outside. The external transfer device 300 has a fork-like robot hand, and can transfer the loaded substrate P from the external device to the port 150A in the exposure apparatus 10A. Then, as described above, the substrate transfer unit 160A transfers the substrate P from the port unit 150A to the substrate holder 28A. The external transfer device 300 can transfer the exposed substrate P transferred to the port 150A by the substrate transfer device 100A from inside the chamber to the external device.
図2に示すように、ポート部150Aは、Y軸方向に所定間隔で配置された複数(本第1実施形態では、例えば8本)のビーム153により構成されたビームユニット152を有している。各ビーム153の上面には、空気吹き出し用の微小な孔部(不図示)が複数形成されている。ビームユニット152は、不図示の加圧気体供給装置から供給される加圧気体(例えば空気)を、上記孔部を介して基板Pの裏面とビームユニット152の上面との間に供給(給気)することによって、基板Pの裏面をビームユニット152の上面に対して離間(基板Pを浮上)させることが可能である。複数のビーム153のY軸方向の間隔は、ビームユニット152により基板Pを下方から支持でき、且つ、外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドをビームユニット152と同一高さに配置したときに、該ロボットハンドが有する複数の指部310が複数のビーム153の間に配置(挿脱)可能なように設定されている。
As shown in FIG. 2, the port section 150A has a beam unit 152 composed of a plurality of (for example, eight in the first embodiment) beams 153 arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y-axis direction. . On the top surface of each beam 153, a plurality of minute holes (not shown) for blowing air are formed. The beam unit 152 supplies pressurized gas (for example, air) supplied from a pressurized gas supply device (not shown) between the back surface of the substrate P and the upper surface of the beam unit 152 through the holes (charging , The rear surface of the substrate P can be separated from the upper surface of the beam unit 152 (the substrate P can be floated). The spacing between the plurality of beams 153 in the Y-axis direction can support the substrate P from below by the beam unit 152, and when the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is arranged at the same height as the beam unit 152, The plurality of finger portions 310 included in each of the plurality of beams 153 are set to be able to be disposed (inserted and removed) between the plurality of beams 153.
各ビーム153の長手方向(X軸方向)の長さは、基板Pの長手方向の長さよりも若干長く、幅方向(Y軸方向)の長さは、基板Pの幅方向の長さの、例えば1/50程度、あるいは基板Pの厚さの、例えば10~50倍程度に設定されている。
The length in the longitudinal direction (X-axis direction) of each beam 153 is slightly longer than the length in the longitudinal direction of the substrate P, and the length in the width direction (Y-axis direction) is the length in the width direction of the substrate P For example, it is set to about 1/50 or about 10 to 50 times the thickness of the substrate P, for example.
図1に示すように、複数のビーム153(図1では紙面奥行き方向に重なっている)それぞれは、複数(例えば2本)の棒状の脚154によって、X軸方向の両端部よりも内側の位置で下方から支持されている。各ビーム153を支持する複数の脚154は、それぞれ下端部がジョイント部155aを介してベース部157に連結され、上端部がジョイント部155bを介してビーム153に連結されている。基板搬送装置100Aでは、ビーム153、脚154、ジョイント部155a,155b、及びベース部157により構成されるリンク機構により、ビームユニット152のX軸方向及びZ軸方向の位置を一体的に変更できるようになっている。リンク機構は、ビームユニット152が、基板ホルダ28Aとの基板受け渡し位置で停止した場合に、基板ホルダ28Aの上面TS、後述するオフセットビーム185aの上面、及びビームユニット152の上面が略同一平面内に含まれるように構成されている。
As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of (for example, two) bar-like legs 154 each of a plurality of beams 153 (which overlap in the depth direction in FIG. 1) are located inward of both ends in the X-axis direction. Is supported from below. Lower ends of the plurality of legs 154 supporting the beams 153 are respectively connected to the base portion 157 via joint portions 155a, and upper ends are connected to the beams 153 via joint portions 155b. In the substrate transfer apparatus 100A, the position of the beam unit 152 in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction can be integrally changed by the link mechanism configured by the beam 153, the legs 154, the joint parts 155a and 155b, and the base part 157. It has become. The link mechanism is such that the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A, the upper surface of the offset beam 185a described later, and the upper surface of the beam unit 152 are substantially in the same plane when the beam unit 152 stops at the substrate delivery position with the substrate holder 28A. It is configured to be included.
図2に戻り、基板搬送部160Aは、上述した外部搬送装置300(図1及び図2参照)と同様の、フォーク状のハンド161A(以下、基板搬入ハンド161Aと称する)を有している。基板搬入ハンド161Aは、複数(本第1実施形態では、例えば7本)の指部162Aを有しており、複数の指部162Aが、基板Pを保持する保持面(以下、基板保持面と記載する)を形成する。
Returning to FIG. 2, the substrate transfer unit 160A includes a fork-like hand 161A (hereinafter referred to as a substrate loading hand 161A) similar to the above-described external transfer device 300 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). The substrate loading hand 161A has a plurality of (for example, seven in the first embodiment) finger portions 162A, and the plurality of finger portions 162A hold the substrate P (hereinafter referred to as a substrate holding surface). Form).
複数の指部162Aは、+X側の端部近傍が連結部材163Aにより互いに連結されている。これに対し、複数の指部162Aの-X側(基板ホルダ28A(図2など参照)側)の端部は、自由端となっており、隣接する指部162A間は、基板ホルダ28A側に開いている。
The plurality of finger portions 162A are connected to each other near the end on the + X side by the connecting member 163A. On the other hand, the end portions on the -X side (the substrate holder 28A (see FIG. 2 and the like) side) of the plurality of finger portions 162A are free ends, and the adjacent finger portions 162A are on the substrate holder 28A side. is open.
図1に示すように、複数の指部162Aにより形成される基板保持面は、基板ホルダ28Aが基板を保持する保持面(以後、ホルダ基板保持面と記載する)に対して傾斜している。すなわち、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面に対し傾斜し、基板P(P2)を保持する基板保持面を有する。このため、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板P2の+X側端部を、基板P2の-X側端部よりも高い位置(+Z側)で保持する。基板搬入ハンド161AのZ位置は、基板搬入ハンド161Aの-X側端部が+X側端部よりも基板ホルダ28Aにより近くなっている。また、複数の指部162Aの先端部(-X側)の近傍では、先端部に近づくほど指部162Aの厚さが薄くなっている。換言すると、指部162Aは、先端部にテーパーがつけられ、テーパー形状を有している。複数の指部162Aがテーパー形状を有しているため、指部162Aの厚さが均一なものと比較すると、基板P2の-X側端部をより基板ホルダ28Aの上面TSに近づけることができる。また、基板搬入ハンド161Aのうち、Z位置が基板ホルダ28Aに接近している面積を小さくできるため、基板搬入ハンド161Aと基板ホルダ28Aとが接触する恐れを低くすることができる。
As shown in FIG. 1, the substrate holding surface formed by the plurality of finger portions 162A is inclined with respect to the holding surface on which the substrate holder 28A holds the substrate (hereinafter referred to as a holder substrate holding surface). That is, the substrate loading hand 161A has a substrate holding surface which holds the substrate P (P2) by inclining with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A. Therefore, the substrate loading hand 161A holds the + X side end of the substrate P2 at a position (+ Z side) higher than the −X side end of the substrate P2. The Z position of the substrate loading hand 161A is such that the −X side end of the substrate loading hand 161A is closer to the substrate holder 28A than the + X side end. Further, in the vicinity of the tip (−X side) of the plurality of fingers 162A, the thickness of the finger 162A is thinner toward the tip. In other words, the finger portion 162A is tapered at its tip end and has a tapered shape. Since the plurality of fingers 162A have a tapered shape, the -X side end of the substrate P2 can be brought closer to the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A as compared with a uniform thickness of the fingers 162A. . Further, since the area of the substrate loading hand 161A in which the Z position approaches the substrate holder 28A can be reduced, the risk of contact between the substrate loading hand 161A and the substrate holder 28A can be reduced.
基板搬入ハンド161Aが有する各指部162Aは、上述した外部搬送装置300のロボットハンド(図2参照)と同様に、Y軸方向において、平面視においてビームユニット152のビーム153と位置が重ならないに配置されている。また、各指部162Aには、基板Pの裏面を支持するための支持パッド164Aが複数取り付けられ、その支持パッド164Aにより、基板搬入ハンド161Aの基板保持面が形成される。基板Pは、その裏面の全面が支持パッド164Aに支持されていなくてもよい。基板保持面は、支持パッド164Aの支持面を仮想的に連結した面で形成されている。
The finger portions 162A of the substrate loading hand 161A do not overlap with the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 in plan view in the Y-axis direction, similarly to the robot hand (see FIG. 2) of the external transfer device 300 described above. It is arranged. Further, a plurality of support pads 164A for supporting the back surface of the substrate P is attached to each finger portion 162A, and the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is formed by the support pads 164A. The entire surface of the back surface of the substrate P may not be supported by the support pad 164A. The substrate holding surface is formed by a surface virtually connecting the support surface of the support pad 164A.
図2に示すように、連結部材163Aは、平面視矩形で、厚さの薄い中空部材でできており、複数のビーム153が配列された方向であるY軸方向に延びている。連結部材163AのY軸方向の両端部は、基板搬入ハンド161AをX軸方向に関して移動させるための一対のX軸駆動装置164に連結されている。なお、一対のX軸駆動装置164は、それぞれ独立に駆動されてもよいし、歯車、あるいはベルトで機械的に連結し、1つの駆動モータによって同時駆動されてもよい。もしくは、連結部材163Aは、Y軸方向に関して一対に限らず片側のX軸駆動装置164のみにより移動されるように構成してもよい。また、一対のX軸駆動装置164は、不図示のZ軸駆動装置によって上下動が可能になっている。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、ビームユニット152の上面よりも高い位置(+Z側)と、ビームユニット152より低い位置(-Z側)との間で移動することが可能となっている。
As shown in FIG. 2, the connecting member 163A is a hollow member having a rectangular shape in a plan view and a small thickness, and extends in the Y-axis direction in which the plurality of beams 153 are arranged. Both ends of the connecting member 163A in the Y-axis direction are connected to a pair of X-axis driving devices 164 for moving the substrate loading hand 161A in the X-axis direction. Note that the pair of X-axis drive devices 164 may be driven independently, or may be mechanically connected by gears or belts and simultaneously driven by one drive motor. Alternatively, the connecting member 163A may be configured to be moved only by the X-axis drive device 164 on one side without being limited to a pair in the Y-axis direction. The pair of X-axis drive devices 164 can be moved up and down by a Z-axis drive device (not shown). Thus, the substrate loading hand 161A can move between a position (+ Z side) higher than the upper surface of the beam unit 152 and a position (−Z side) lower than the beam unit 152.
また、基板搬送部160Aは、1又は複数(本第1実施形態では、例えば2つ)の基板搬出ハンド170Aを備える。本第1実施形態においては、2つの基板搬出ハンド170AがY軸方向に離間して配置されている。
Further, the substrate transfer unit 160A includes one or more (for example, two in the first embodiment) substrate unloading hands 170A. In the first embodiment, two substrate carry-out hands 170A are spaced apart in the Y-axis direction.
各基板搬出ハンド170Aは、保持パッド171Aを備える。保持パッド171Aは、不図示のバキューム装置から供給される真空吸引力により、基板Pの下面を吸着保持することができるようになっている。
Each substrate unloading hand 170A includes a holding pad 171A. The holding pad 171A can hold the lower surface of the substrate P by suction by the vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown).
基板搬出ハンド170Aは、例えば多関節ロボットあるいはパラレルリンクロボットとして構成され、保持パッド171AのX位置、Y位置、及びZ位置を変更できるようになっている。
The substrate unloading hand 170A is configured, for example, as an articulated robot or a parallel link robot, and can change the X position, the Y position, and the Z position of the holding pad 171A.
(搬送装置180A)
搬送装置180Aは、基板交換時において、基板搬送部160Aと協働する装置である。換言すると、露光装置10Aでは、基板搬送部160Aと搬送装置180Aとを用いて基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板Pの搬入および搬出が行われる。また、搬送装置180Aは、基板Pを基板ホルダ28A上に載置する際に、該基板Pの位置決めにも用いられる。搬送装置180Aについて図3(a)~図3(c)を用いて詳細に説明する。 (Transportingdevice 180A)
Thetransfer device 180A is a device that cooperates with the substrate transfer unit 160A at the time of substrate replacement. In other words, in the exposure apparatus 10A, the loading and unloading of the substrate P with respect to the substrate holder 28A is performed using the substrate transfer unit 160A and the transfer device 180A. The transfer device 180A is also used for positioning the substrate P when the substrate P is placed on the substrate holder 28A. The transfer device 180A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (c).
搬送装置180Aは、基板交換時において、基板搬送部160Aと協働する装置である。換言すると、露光装置10Aでは、基板搬送部160Aと搬送装置180Aとを用いて基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板Pの搬入および搬出が行われる。また、搬送装置180Aは、基板Pを基板ホルダ28A上に載置する際に、該基板Pの位置決めにも用いられる。搬送装置180Aについて図3(a)~図3(c)を用いて詳細に説明する。 (Transporting
The
搬送装置180Aは、図3(a)~図3(c)に示すように、一対の基板搬入ベアラ装置182A、一対の基板搬出ベアラ装置183A、及びオフセットビーム部185を備えている。
As shown in FIGS. 3A to 3C, the transfer device 180A includes a pair of substrate loading bearer devices 182A, a pair of substrate unloading bearer devices 183A, and an offset beam unit 185.
基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aは、図3(b)に示すように、保持パッド184a、Xアクチュエータ186x、及びZアクチュエータ186zを備えている。
The substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A includes a holding pad 184a, an X actuator 186x, and a Z actuator 186z as shown in FIG. 3 (b).
保持パッド184aは、平面視矩形の板状の部材から成り、不図示のバキューム装置から供給される真空吸引力により、基板Pの下面を吸着保持することができるようになっている。また、図3(b)に示すように、保持パッド184aは、Zアクチュエータ186zによりZ軸方向に駆動可能となっている。また、保持パッド184a及びZアクチュエータ186zは、基板テーブル24に取り付けられたXアクチュエータ186xにより、一体的にX軸方向に駆動可能となっている。
The holding pad 184a is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular shape in a plan view, and can hold the lower surface of the substrate P by suction by a vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown). Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, the holding pad 184a can be driven in the Z-axis direction by the Z actuator 186z. The holding pad 184 a and the Z actuator 186 z can be integrally driven in the X axis direction by the X actuator 186 x attached to the substrate table 24.
基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aは、図3(c)に示すように、保持パッド184b、Xアクチュエータ186x、及びZアクチュエータ186zを備えている。図3(c)に示すように、一方(+Y側)の基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aの保持パッド184bは、基板ホルダ28Aに形成された、例えば2つの切り欠き28bのうち、一方(+Y側)の切り欠き28b内に一部が挿入されている。また、他方(-Y側)の基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aの保持パッド184bは、他方(-Y側)の切り欠き28b内に一部が挿入されている。
As shown in FIG. 3C, the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A includes a holding pad 184b, an X actuator 186x, and a Z actuator 186z. As shown in FIG. 3C, the holding pad 184b of one (+ Y side) of the substrate carry-out bearer apparatus 183A is formed on the substrate holder 28A, for example, one (+ Y side) of two notches 28b. A part is inserted into the notch 28b. Further, a part of the holding pad 184b of the other (-Y side) board unloading bearer device 183A is inserted into the other (-Y side) notch 28b.
保持パッド184bは、平面視矩形の板状の部材から成り、不図示のバキューム装置から供給される真空吸引力により、基板Pの下面を吸着保持することができるようになっている。
The holding pad 184 b is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular shape in a plan view, and can hold the lower surface of the substrate P by suction by a vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown).
図3(c)に示すように、保持パッド184bは、Zアクチュエータ186zによりZ軸方向に駆動可能となっている。また、保持パッド184b及びZアクチュエータ186zは、基板テーブル24に取り付けられたXアクチュエータ186xにより、一体的にX軸方向に駆動可能となっている。Zアクチュエータ186zは、保持パッド184bを支持する支柱を含み、該支柱は、基板ホルダ28Aの外側に配置されている。保持パッド184bは、Zアクチュエータ186zにより切り欠き28b内で駆動されることにより、基板Pの下面に接触して保持可能な位置と、基板Pの下面から離間する位置との間で移動可能となっている。また、保持パッド184bは、Zアクチュエータ186zによって、切り欠き28b内に一部が収容された位置と、基板ホルダ28Aの上面よりも高い位置との間で移動可能になっている。また、保持パッド184bは、Xアクチュエータ186xによりZアクチュエータ186zと一体的に駆動されることにより、X軸方向に移動可能となっている。
As shown in FIG. 3C, the holding pad 184b can be driven in the Z-axis direction by the Z actuator 186z. The holding pad 184 b and the Z actuator 186 z can be integrally driven in the X axis direction by the X actuator 186 x attached to the substrate table 24. The Z actuator 186z includes a support that supports the holding pad 184b, and the support is disposed outside the substrate holder 28A. The holding pad 184b is driven in the notch 28b by the Z actuator 186z so that the holding pad 184b can move between a position where it can be held in contact with the lower surface of the substrate P and held and a position where it is separated from the lower surface of the substrate P. ing. Further, the holding pad 184b is movable by the Z actuator 186z between a position where a part is accommodated in the notch 28b and a position higher than the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A. The holding pad 184b is movable in the X-axis direction by being driven integrally with the Z actuator 186z by the X actuator 186x.
オフセットビーム部185は、Y軸方向に所定間隔で配置された複数(本第1実施形態では、例えば8本)のオフセットビーム185aを有している。オフセットビーム185aは、基板テーブル24に取り付けられた支持部材185bにより支持され、その上面と基板ホルダ28Aの上面TSとが略同一平面内に含まれるように配置されている。オフセットビーム185aの上面には、空気吹き出し用の微小な孔部(不図示)が複数形成されている。オフセットビーム185aは、不図示の加圧気体供給装置から供給される加圧気体(空気)を、上記孔部を介してオフセットビーム185aの上面と基板Pの裏面との間に供給(給気)する。これにより、基板Pの裏面をオフセットビーム185aの上面に対して離間(基板Pを浮上)させることが可能である。
The offset beam portion 185 has a plurality of (for example, eight in the first embodiment) offset beams 185a arranged at predetermined intervals in the Y-axis direction. The offset beam 185a is supported by a support member 185b attached to the substrate table 24, and is arranged such that the upper surface thereof and the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A are included in substantially the same plane. A plurality of minute holes (not shown) for blowing air are formed on the upper surface of the offset beam 185a. The offset beam 185a supplies pressurized gas (air) supplied from a pressurized gas supply device (not shown) between the upper surface of the offset beam 185a and the back surface of the substrate P through the holes (charge supply). Do. As a result, it is possible to separate the back surface of the substrate P from the top surface of the offset beam 185a (float the substrate P).
搬送装置180Aの動作の詳細については後述する。
Details of the operation of the transfer device 180A will be described later.
なお、基板搬入ベアラ装置182A及び基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aの構成は、適宜変更が可能である。例えば各ベアラ装置182A,183Aは、本実施形態では、基板テーブル24に取り付けられたが、これに限定されず、例えば基板ホルダ28A、あるいは基板テーブル24をXY平面内で駆動するためのXYステージ装置(不図示)に取り付けられていても良い。また、各ベアラ装置182A,183Aの位置、及び数も、これに限定されず、例えば基板テーブル24の+Y側、及び-Y側の側面に取り付けられても良い。
The configurations of the substrate loading bearer device 182A and the substrate unloading bearer device 183A can be changed as appropriate. For example, each bearer device 182A, 183A is attached to the substrate table 24 in the present embodiment, but is not limited thereto. For example, an XY stage device for driving the substrate holder 28A or the substrate table 24 in the XY plane It may be attached to (not shown). Further, the position and the number of the bearer devices 182A and 183A are not limited to this, and may be attached to the side surface on the + Y side and the -Y side of the substrate table 24, for example.
上述のようにして構成された露光装置10A(図1参照)では、不図示の主制御装置の管理の下、不図示のマスクローダによって、マスクステージ14上へのマスクMのロードが行われるとともに、基板搬送装置100Aによって、基板ホルダ28A上への基板Pの搬入が行なわれる。その後、主制御装置により、不図示のアライメント検出系を用いてアライメント計測が実行され、そのアライメント計測の終了後、基板P上に設定された複数のショット領域に逐次ステップ・アンド・スキャン方式の露光動作が行なわれる。この露光動作は従来から行われているステップ・アンド・スキャン方式の露光動作と同様であるので、X方向をスキャン方向とする。なお、ステップ・アンド・スキャン方式の露光動作に関する詳細な説明は省略するものとする。そして、露光処理が終了した基板P(P1)が基板搬送装置100Aにより基板ホルダ28A上から搬出されるとともに、次に露光される別の基板P(P2)が基板ホルダ28Aに搬入されることにより、基板ホルダ28A上の基板Pの交換が行われ、複数の基板Pに対する一連の露光動作が行われる。
In the exposure apparatus 10A (see FIG. 1) configured as described above, the mask loader (not shown) loads the mask M onto the mask stage 14 under the control of the main controller (not shown). The substrate transfer apparatus 100A carries the substrate P onto the substrate holder 28A. Thereafter, alignment measurement is performed by the main controller using an alignment detection system (not shown), and after completion of the alignment measurement, step-and-scan exposure is sequentially performed on a plurality of shot areas set on the substrate P An operation is performed. Since this exposure operation is similar to that of the step-and-scan method conventionally performed, the X direction is taken as the scan direction. A detailed description of the step-and-scan exposure operation is omitted. Then, the substrate P (P1) for which the exposure processing has been completed is carried out of the substrate holder 28A by the substrate transfer apparatus 100A, and another substrate P (P2) to be exposed next is carried in the substrate holder 28A. The substrates P on the substrate holder 28A are exchanged, and a series of exposure operations on the plurality of substrates P are performed.
(基板交換動作)
以下、露光装置10Aにおける基板ホルダ28A上の基板Pの交換動作について、図4~図8を用いて説明する。以下の基板交換動作は、不図示の主制御装置により制御される。なお、基板交換動作を説明するための図4~図8における各側面図では、基板搬送部160Aの動作の理解を容易にするため、X軸駆動装置164等の図示が適宜省略されている。 (Substrate exchange operation)
Hereinafter, the exchange operation of the substrate P on thesubstrate holder 28A in the exposure apparatus 10A will be described with reference to FIG. 4 to FIG. The following substrate exchange operation is controlled by a main controller (not shown). Note that, in each side view in FIGS. 4 to 8 for describing the substrate replacing operation, the X-axis drive device 164 and the like are appropriately omitted to facilitate understanding of the operation of the substrate transfer unit 160A.
以下、露光装置10Aにおける基板ホルダ28A上の基板Pの交換動作について、図4~図8を用いて説明する。以下の基板交換動作は、不図示の主制御装置により制御される。なお、基板交換動作を説明するための図4~図8における各側面図では、基板搬送部160Aの動作の理解を容易にするため、X軸駆動装置164等の図示が適宜省略されている。 (Substrate exchange operation)
Hereinafter, the exchange operation of the substrate P on the
また、以下の説明では、ステージ装置20Aの基板ホルダ28Aには、あらかじめ露光済みの基板P1が載置されており、該露光済みの基板P1を搬出しつつ、基板P1とは別の基板P2を基板ホルダ28Aに載置する搬入動作について説明する。なお、図4~図8の各図面において、理解を容易にするため、構成要素の動作方向が模式的に白抜矢印で示されている。また、気体を吸引または供給(給気)する状態が一群の黒矢印によって模式的に示されている。
Further, in the following description, the exposed substrate P1 is placed on the substrate holder 28A of the stage device 20A in advance, and the substrate P2 different from the substrate P1 is removed while carrying out the exposed substrate P1. A loading operation for placing on the substrate holder 28A will be described. In the drawings of FIGS. 4 to 8, the operating directions of the components are schematically indicated by white arrows for easy understanding. In addition, the state of sucking or supplying (charging) the gas is schematically shown by a group of black arrows.
図4(a)及び図4(b)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、外部搬送装置300によって基板P2がポート部150Aへ搬送されるまでに、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面が、ビームユニット152の下方に位置するように、移動される。このとき、ポート部150Aは、脚154がθy方向に回転駆動される。これによって、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、Z方向に関して、ビームユニット152と基板搬入ハンド161Aとの間に、外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドを配置可能なように、ビームユニット152の下方に配置される。
As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A of the substrate loading hand 161A is a beam unit until the substrate P2 is transferred to the port 150A by the external transfer device 300. It is moved to be located below 152. At this time, the leg 154 of the port portion 150A is rotationally driven in the θy direction. Thus, the substrate loading hand 161A is disposed below the beam unit 152 so that the robot hand of the external transfer apparatus 300 can be disposed between the beam unit 152 and the substrate loading hand 161A in the Z direction.
なお、ポート部150Aの、この位置が外部搬送装置300との基板受け渡し位置となる。
In addition, this position of the port portion 150A is a substrate delivery position with the external transfer device 300.
基板P2を保持した外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドは、基板P2がビームユニット152の上空(+Z側)に位置するように、-X方向に移動される。このとき、外部搬送装置300が有するフォーク状のロボットハンドの各指部が、平面視でY軸方向において互いに隣接するビームユニット152同士の隙間に位置するように、外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドとビームユニット152とのY位置が位置決めされている。
The robot hand of the external transfer device 300 holding the substrate P 2 is moved in the −X direction so that the substrate P 2 is positioned above the beam unit 152 (+ Z side). At this time, the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 and the finger of the fork-like robot hand of the external transfer device 300 are positioned in the gaps between the beam units 152 adjacent to each other in the Y-axis direction in plan view. The Y position with the beam unit 152 is positioned.
次に、図4(c)に示すように、外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドが降下駆動され、このロボットハンドの各指部がビームユニット152の複数のビームの隙間を通過することにより、外部搬送装置300は基板P2がビームユニット152上に受け渡す。ビームユニット152の下方で待機している基板搬送部160Aと接触しないように、外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドのZ位置が制御される。この後、外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドは+X方向に駆動されることにより、露光装置10A内から退出する。
Next, as shown in FIG. 4C, the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is driven to descend, and the fingers of the robot hand pass through the gaps of the plurality of beams of the beam unit 152 to perform external transfer. The apparatus 300 delivers the substrate P 2 onto the beam unit 152. The Z position of the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is controlled so as not to contact the substrate transfer unit 160A waiting below the beam unit 152. Thereafter, the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is driven out in the + X direction to withdraw from the inside of the exposure apparatus 10A.
基板搬送部160Aは、上昇移動(+Z方向に移動)され、基板搬出ハンド170Aの保持パッド171Aがビームユニット152上の基板P2の下面を吸着把持する。この後、図5(a)に示すように、ポート部150Aのビームユニット152が有する複数のビーム153それぞれに対して加圧気体が供給され、該加圧気体が複数のビーム153それぞれの上面から基板P2の下面に向けて給気(噴出)される。これにより、基板P2が基板搬送部160Aに吸着支持されつつ、基板P2がビームユニット152に対して、微小な(例えば、数十マイクロメートルから数百マイクロメートルの)隙間を介して浮上する。また、ビームユニット152は、ポート部150Aの脚154がθy方向に関して回転駆動されることで、-X方向及び-Z方向に移動される。
The substrate transfer unit 160A moves upward (moves in the + Z direction), and the holding pad 171A of the substrate unloading hand 170A suctions and holds the lower surface of the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5A, pressurized gas is supplied to each of the plurality of beams 153 of the beam unit 152 of the port portion 150A, and the pressurized gas is supplied from the upper surface of each of the plurality of beams 153. The air is supplied (jetted) toward the lower surface of the substrate P2. As a result, the substrate P2 floats up relative to the beam unit 152 via a minute gap (for example, several tens of micrometers to several hundreds of micrometers) while the substrate P2 is adsorbed and supported by the substrate transfer unit 160A. Further, the beam unit 152 is moved in the −X direction and the −Z direction by rotationally driving the leg 154 of the port portion 150A in the θy direction.
基板P2の下面を吸着把持した基板搬出ハンド170Aの保持パッド171Aは、適宜X軸、Y軸、及びθz方向(水平面内3自由度方向)に微小駆動され、これにより基板搬入ハンド161Aに対する基板P2の位置調整(アライメント)が行われる。基板P2は、ビームユニット152により非接触支持されているので、基板P2の水平面内3自由度方向の位置調整(微小量の移動)を、低摩擦の状態で行うことができる。なお、ここで述べた基板P2の位置調整(アライメント)は、省略することができ、必要に応じて実施するように制御してもよい。
The holding pad 171A of the substrate carry-out hand 170A holding the lower surface of the substrate P2 by suction is appropriately minutely driven in the X-axis, Y-axis, and θz directions (three degrees of freedom in the horizontal plane), whereby the substrate P2 for the substrate carry-in hand 161A is Position adjustment (alignment) is performed. Since the substrate P2 is supported by the beam unit 152 in a noncontact manner, position adjustment (movement of a small amount) in the direction of three degrees of freedom in the horizontal plane of the substrate P2 can be performed in a low friction state. In addition, position adjustment (alignment) of the board | substrate P2 described here can be abbreviate | omitted, and you may control to implement as needed.
この後、図5(b)に示す位置まで、基板搬送部160Aが+Z方向へ上昇駆動される。これにより、ビームユニット152上の基板P2が基板搬入ハンド161Aに受け渡される。換言すると、ビームユニット152上の基板P2が、基板搬入ハンド161Aにより下方から掬い取られる。
Thereafter, the substrate transport unit 160A is driven to rise in the + Z direction to the position shown in FIG. 5 (b). Thus, the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 is delivered to the substrate loading hand 161A. In other words, the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 is scooped from below by the substrate loading hand 161A.
ビームユニット152は、脚154がθy方向に関してさらに回転駆動されることで、さらに-X方向に駆動され、基板ホルダ28Aから基板P1を搬出するための、基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板受け渡し位置(図5(c)に図示された位置)へと移動する。
The beam unit 152 is further driven in the −X direction as the leg 154 is further rotationally driven in the θy direction, and the substrate delivery position with respect to the substrate holder 28A for unloading the substrate P1 from the substrate holder 28A (FIG. Move to the position shown in c)).
また、上述した外部搬送装置300から基板搬入ハンド161Aへのポート部150Aを介した基板P2の受け渡し動作(適宜アライメント動作を含む)と並行して、ステージ装置20Aでは、露光済みの基板P1を載置した基板ホルダ28Aが所定の基板交換位置(ポート部150Aに対する基板受け渡し位置)に配置するように、基板テーブル24が+X方向に移動される。本第1実施形態において、基板ホルダ28Aの基板交換位置は、ポート部150Aに対して-X側の位置である。なお、理解を容易にするために、図4(a)~図5(b)では基板ホルダ28Aが同一位置に図示されているが、露光装置10Aの通常の稼働時には、上記基板P2の外部搬送装置300から基板搬入ハンド161Aへの受け渡し動作と並行して基板P1に対する露光動作が行われており、その際に基板ホルダ28Aは、X方向およびY方向に関して適宜移動している。
Further, in parallel with the delivery operation (including the alignment operation as appropriate) of the substrate P2 from the external transfer apparatus 300 to the substrate loading hand 161A via the port unit 150A described above, the stage device 20A places the exposed substrate P1. The substrate table 24 is moved in the + X direction so that the placed substrate holder 28A is disposed at a predetermined substrate exchange position (substrate delivery position with respect to the port 150A). In the first embodiment, the substrate replacement position of the substrate holder 28A is the position on the −X side with respect to the port 150A. Although the substrate holder 28A is illustrated at the same position in FIGS. 4A to 5B for easy understanding, during normal operation of the exposure apparatus 10A, the external transfer of the substrate P2 is performed. The exposure operation for the substrate P1 is performed in parallel with the delivery operation from the device 300 to the substrate loading hand 161A, and at this time, the substrate holder 28A is appropriately moved in the X direction and the Y direction.
また、基板ホルダ28Aの基板交換位置への移動動作と並行して、一対の基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aそれぞれの保持パッド184bが上昇駆動される。保持パッド184bは、基板ホルダ28Aの上面に真空吸着保持されている基板P1の一部(切り欠き28b(図3(a)及び図3(c)参照)上に配置された部分)を、裏面から吸着把持する。
Further, in parallel with the movement operation of the substrate holder 28A to the substrate exchange position, the holding pad 184b of each of the pair of substrate carry-out bearer devices 183A is driven to ascend. The holding pad 184b is a back surface of a portion of the substrate P1 held by vacuum suction on the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A (a portion disposed on the notch 28b (see FIG. 3A and FIG. 3C)). Hold by suction from
この後、図5(c)に示すように、基板P2を支持した基板搬入ハンド161Aが、-X方向に移動される。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板交換位置に位置決めされた基板ホルダ28Aの上空へ移動される。一方、ビームユニット152の上面のZ位置と、基板ホルダ28Aの上面のZ位置とは、ほぼ同じ高さに設定されている。なお、これらをほぼ同じ高さに設定するにあたって、基板ホルダ28AをZ軸方向に駆動して、高さを調整しても良い。
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5C, the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 is moved in the −X direction. Thus, the substrate loading hand 161A is moved to the upper side of the substrate holder 28A positioned at the substrate exchange position. On the other hand, the Z position of the top surface of the beam unit 152 and the Z position of the top surface of the substrate holder 28A are set to substantially the same height. In order to set these to substantially the same height, the height may be adjusted by driving the substrate holder 28A in the Z-axis direction.
オフセットビーム部185では、オフセットビーム185aの上面から加圧気体が噴出される。
In the offset beam portion 185, pressurized gas is ejected from the upper surface of the offset beam 185a.
また、ステージ装置20Aでは、基板ホルダ28Aの上面から基板P1の下面に対して加圧気体が給気(噴出)される。これにより、基板P1が基板ホルダ28Aの上面TSから浮上し、基板P1の下面と基板ホルダ28Aの上面TSとの間の摩擦が低摩擦状態となる。
Further, in the stage device 20A, pressurized gas is supplied (sprayed) from the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A to the lower surface of the substrate P1. Thereby, the substrate P1 floats from the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A, and the friction between the lower surface of the substrate P1 and the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A is in a low friction state.
さらに、ステージ装置20Aでは、基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aの保持パッド184bが、上記基板P1の浮上動作に追従するように+Z方向にわずかに上昇駆動されるとともに、基板P1の一部を吸着把持した状態で、+X方向(ポート部150A側)に、所定のストロークで移動される。保持パッド184b(すなわち基板P1)の移動量は、例えば50mm~100mm程度に設定される。これにより、基板P1の+X側の端部がオフセットビーム185aに非接触支持され、基板P1の位置がX方向に関して基板ホルダ28Aから+X方向側へ所定量オフセットされる。
Further, in the stage device 20A, the holding pad 184b of the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A is slightly raised and driven in the + Z direction so as to follow the floating operation of the substrate P1, and a part of the substrate P1 is held by suction. Then, it is moved in the + X direction (port 150A side) with a predetermined stroke. The amount of movement of the holding pad 184b (ie, the substrate P1) is set to, for example, about 50 mm to 100 mm. Thereby, the end on the + X side of the substrate P1 is supported by the offset beam 185a in a noncontact manner, and the position of the substrate P1 is offset from the substrate holder 28A in the X direction by a predetermined amount in the + X direction.
さらに、ステージ装置20Aでは、一対の基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aが、所定のストロークで+X方向に移動される。
Furthermore, in the stage device 20A, the holding pads 184a of the pair of substrate loading bearer devices 182A are moved in the + X direction with a predetermined stroke.
図6(a)に示すように、基板P2を支持した基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板ホルダ28Aの上空における所定位置に配置される。これにより、基板P2は、基板交換位置に位置決めされた基板ホルダ28Aのほぼ真上に位置する。このとき、基板搬入ハンド161Aと基板ホルダ28Aとは、基板P1のY位置と基板P2のY位置とが、ほぼ一致するように、位置決めされる。これに対し、X方向に関しては、基板P1と基板P2とが異なる位置に配置される。具体的には、上述したように基板P1が+X側へ基板ホルダ28Aからオフセットしている分だけ、基板P1及びP2のX位置が相対的に異なっており、基板P2の-X側の端部は、基板P1の-X側の端部よりも-X側に配置されている(突き出している)。なお、このとき、基板搬入ハンド161A上の基板P2は、基板搬出ハンド170Aによってその下面を吸着把持されていてもよいし、指部162Aによって吸着把持もしくは摩擦力によって保持されていてもよい。なお、基板ホルダ28Aに切り欠き28bを形成しなくてもよい。上述のとおり、基板ホルダ28Aの上面の長辺及び短辺の長さは、基板Pの長辺及び短辺の長さに対して、それぞれ幾分短く設定されている場合、基板ホルダ28Aからはみ出した基板Pを保持パット184bが保持した状態で+X軸方向へ移動し、基板Pを基板ホルダ28Aの上面TSから+X側へオフセットさせることができるのであれば、切り欠き28bを基板ホルダ28A上に形成しなくてもよい。この場合、基板Pの端部においても基板ホルダ28A上の平面矯正が行えるようになる。
As shown in FIG. 6A, the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 is disposed at a predetermined position above the substrate holder 28A. Thereby, the substrate P2 is positioned almost right above the substrate holder 28A positioned at the substrate exchange position. At this time, the substrate loading hand 161A and the substrate holder 28A are positioned such that the Y position of the substrate P1 and the Y position of the substrate P2 substantially coincide with each other. On the other hand, in the X direction, the substrate P1 and the substrate P2 are disposed at different positions. Specifically, as described above, the X positions of the substrates P1 and P2 are relatively different from each other by the offset of the substrate P1 from the substrate holder 28A to the + X side, and the end of the substrate P2 on the -X side Are disposed (projected) closer to the −X side than the end on the −X side of the substrate P1. At this time, the lower surface of the substrate P2 on the substrate loading hand 161A may be suction-held by the substrate carry-out hand 170A, or may be held by suction holding or frictional force by the finger portion 162A. The notch 28b may not be formed in the substrate holder 28A. As described above, when the lengths of the long side and the short side of the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A are set somewhat short with respect to the lengths of the long side and the short side of the substrate P respectively, they protrude from the substrate holder 28A If the substrate P can be offset from the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A to the + X side by moving the substrate P in the + X-axis direction while holding the holding pad 184b, the notch 28b is placed on the substrate holder 28A. It does not have to be formed. In this case, planar correction on the substrate holder 28A can be performed even at the end of the substrate P.
その後、図6(b)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板ホルダ28Aと接触しない位置まで-Z方向に駆動される。基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板P2の-X側端部(基板P2の一部)を、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接触させる。そして、保持パッド184aは、基板搬入ハンド161A上の基板P2の一部を下方から吸着保持する。保持パッド184aは、Z軸方向の位置が、基板ホルダ28Aの上面と基板搬入ハンド161Aの基板保持面との間の位置で、基板P2の一部を吸着保持する。保持パッド184aは、基板P2を吸着保持すると、基板P2のX位置とY位置とを拘束する。これにより、基板P2が基板搬入ハンド161A外へ移動されることを防ぐことができる。基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aは、基板P2の-X側端部の狭い面積を保持する。より具体的には、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aだけでは基板P2全体を支持することができない程度の面積である。なお、基板搬入ハンド161Aの指部のX方向の寸法は基板P2のX方向の寸法より短いと説明したが、同程度の寸法でも良いし、基板搬入ハンド161Aの指部のX方向の寸法のほうが長くてもよい。その場合は、保持パッド184aは、基板搬入ハンド161Aの指部と指部との間の領域を保持するようにすればよい。
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6B, the substrate loading hand 161A is driven in the −Z direction to a position not in contact with the substrate holder 28A. The substrate loading hand 161A brings the −X side end of the substrate P2 (a part of the substrate P2) into contact with the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A. Then, the holding pad 184a sucks and holds a part of the substrate P2 on the substrate loading hand 161A from below. The holding pad 184a holds a part of the substrate P2 by suction at a position between the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A and the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161A at a position in the Z-axis direction. When the holding pad 184a holds the substrate P2 by suction, the holding pad 184a restrains the X position and the Y position of the substrate P2. This can prevent the substrate P2 from being moved out of the substrate loading hand 161A. The substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A holds a narrow area of the −X side end of the substrate P2. More specifically, the area is such that the entire substrate P2 can not be supported by the substrate loading bearer device 182A alone. Although the X-direction dimension of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand 161A is described as being shorter than the X-direction dimension of the substrate P2, the dimension may be similar or the X dimension of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand 161A. It may be longer. In that case, the holding pad 184a may hold an area between the finger and the finger of the substrate loading hand 161A.
また、保持パッド184aによる基板P2の吸着保持動作と並行して、基板P2の吸着把持を解放した基板搬出ハンド170Aが駆動され、基板P1のうち、基板ホルダ28Aから+X側にオフセットされた部分の下面を吸着把持する。また、ビームユニット152は、加圧気体を噴出させる。
Further, in parallel with the suction holding operation of the substrate P2 by the holding pad 184a, the substrate carry-out hand 170A releasing the suction gripping of the substrate P2 is driven, and a portion of the substrate P1 offset to the + X side from the substrate holder 28A. Hold the lower surface by suction. Further, the beam unit 152 ejects pressurized gas.
その後、図6(c)に示すように、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aが、基板P2の一部(-X側端部)を吸着把持した状態で、基板搬送部160Aが搬出方向(+X方向)に移動される。なお、このとき、基板搬入ハンド161Aの指部162Aから基板P2の下面に対して加圧気体を給気(噴出)して、接触摩擦を低減するとよい。
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6C, in a state where the holding pad 184a of the substrate carry-in bearer device 182A sucks and holds a part of the substrate P2 (the end portion on the -X side), Move in the + X direction). At this time, pressurized gas may be supplied (jetted) from the finger portion 162A of the substrate loading hand 161A to the lower surface of the substrate P2 to reduce the contact friction.
基板搬送部160Aが搬出方向(+X方向)に駆動されるとともに、基板P1を保持した基板搬出ハンド170Aが+X方向へ駆動される。これにより、基板P1が基板ホルダ28A上から、ポート部150A(ビームユニット152)上へ移動する。このとき、ビームユニット152が有するビーム153それぞれの上面からは加圧気体が噴出されているので、基板P1は、基板ホルダ28A及びポート部150Aに対して非接触状態(浮上した状態)で基板ホルダ28Aから搬出される。また、一対の基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aそれぞれの保持パッド184bは、基板ホルダ28Aの切り欠き28b(図3(a)及び図3(c)参照)内に一部が収容されるように、-Z方向及び-X方向に駆動される。
The substrate transport unit 160A is driven in the unloading direction (+ X direction), and the substrate unloading hand 170A holding the substrate P1 is driven in the + X direction. Thus, the substrate P1 is moved from the substrate holder 28A to the port 150A (beam unit 152). At this time, since pressurized gas is jetted from the upper surface of each of the beams 153 of the beam unit 152, the substrate P1 is in a non-contact state (floating state) with respect to the substrate holder 28A and the port portion 150A. It is carried out from 28A. In addition, the holding pad 184b of each of the pair of substrate carry-out bearer devices 183A is -Z so that a part is accommodated in the notch 28b of the substrate holder 28A (see FIGS. 3A and 3C). It is driven in the direction and the -X direction.
また、図6(c)及び図7(a)~図7(c)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Aが+X方向へ移動されることにより、保持パッド184aによって一部が保持された基板P2に対して基板搬入ハンド161AがX方向に関して相対移動される。そして、図7(c)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Aが、X方向に関して基板ホルダ28Aよりも+X側まで移動されることで、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板ホルダ28Aの上空(+Z側の空間)および基板P2の下方(-Z側の空間)から退避される。換言すると、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板ホルダ28Aよりも+X側へ移動されることにより、保持パッド184aにより一部が保持された基板P2と基板ホルダ28Aとの間の空間から退避される。基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板ホルダ28Aよりも+X側へ移動する際、基板ホルダ28Aの上空、つまり、基板ホルダ28Aの上面よりもZ位置が高い位置を移動する。このように、基板P2と基板ホルダ28Aとの間の空間から基板搬入ハンド161Aが退避されることで、基板P2が基板搬入ハンド161Aから基板ホルダ28Aに受け渡される。すなわち、基板搬入ハンド161Aから基板ホルダ28Aへ基板P2が搬入される。基板P2のうち、基板搬入ハンド161Aと保持パッド184aとの間の領域が、基板ホルダ28Aにより保持される。
Further, as shown in FIGS. 6C and 7A to 7C, the substrate loading hand 161A is moved in the + X direction, whereby the substrate P2 partially held by the holding pad 184a. The substrate loading hand 161A is moved relative to the X direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 7C, the substrate loading hand 161A is moved to the + X side with respect to the substrate holder 28A in the X direction, so that the substrate loading hand 161A is in the upper space (+ Z side) of the substrate holder 28A. Space) and the lower side of the substrate P2 (the space on the -Z side). In other words, the substrate loading hand 161A is moved to the + X side with respect to the substrate holder 28A, so that it is retracted from the space between the substrate P2 partially held by the holding pad 184a and the substrate holder 28A. When the substrate loading hand 161A moves to the + X side with respect to the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading hand 161A moves above the substrate holder 28A, that is, at a position where the Z position is higher than the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A. Thus, the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from the space between the substrate P2 and the substrate holder 28A, whereby the substrate P2 is delivered from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate holder 28A. That is, the substrate P2 is carried from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate holder 28A. In the substrate P2, the region between the substrate loading hand 161A and the holding pad 184a is held by the substrate holder 28A.
ここで、保持パッド184aは、基板P2の一部を吸着保持することにより、基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板P2の相対位置を、X方向およびY方向に関して、固定もしくは所定の微小な可動範囲内に制限している。この所定の可動範囲は、基板ホルダ28A(もしくは基板テーブル24)に対する保持パッド184aの駆動範囲により設定される。なお、保持パッド184aは、X方向およびY方向の少なくとも一方に関して、基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板P2の相対位置(相対的な可動範囲)を設定する機能を有していれば、必ずしも基板テーブル24(もしくは基板ホルダ28A)に設置されていなくてもよく、例えば、露光装置10Aの不図示のコラム等の構造体に設けられ、基板ホルダ28Aの上空から吊り下げられた構成としてもよい。なお、この場合は、保持パッド184aが基板P2の上面を保持するようにしてもよい。
Here, the holding pad 184a adsorbs and holds a part of the substrate P2, thereby limiting the relative position of the substrate P2 to the substrate holder 28A in a fixed or predetermined minute movable range in the X and Y directions. ing. The predetermined movable range is set by the drive range of the holding pad 184a with respect to the substrate holder 28A (or the substrate table 24). If the holding pad 184a has a function of setting the relative position (relative movable range) of the substrate P2 to the substrate holder 28A with respect to at least one of the X direction and the Y direction, the substrate table 24 (or It does not have to be installed in the substrate holder 28A). For example, it may be installed in a structure such as a column (not shown) of the exposure apparatus 10A and may be suspended from above the substrate holder 28A. In this case, the holding pad 184a may hold the upper surface of the substrate P2.
上述のように、基板搬入ハンド161Aが、基板ホルダ28Aに対して+X方向、つまり基板ホルダ28Aの基板保持面に沿う方向、基板ホルダ28Aの基板保持面と平行な方向へ相対移動することにより基板P2の下方から退避するにつれて、基板P2の一部が-X側から順次に基板ホルダ28A上に載置されていく。その際、基板搬入ハンド161Aが保持する基板P2の面積が減少し、基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面が支持する基板P2の面積が増加する。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Aの-X側の先端部が基板ホルダ28Aよりも+X側に移動されるまでの期間(すなわち、基板ホルダ28Aと基板P2との間の空間から基板搬入ハンド161Aがすべて退避されるまでの期間)の少なくとも一部の期間において、基板搬入ハンド161Aと基板ホルダ28Aと保持パッド184aとは、それぞれ基板P2の互いに異なる部分を同時に支持(もしくは保持)することになる。換言すると、その少なくとも一部の期間において、基板P2のほぼ全面が基板搬入ハンド161A、基板ホルダ28Aおよび保持パッド184aによって支持される(基板P2の任意の部分が基板搬入ハンド161A、基板ホルダ28Aおよび保持パッド184aのいずれかによって支持される)ことになる。なお、基板搬入ハンド161Aと基板ホルダ28Aとによる基板P2の支持(もしくは保持)は、接触した状態に限らず、気体(エアギャップ)を介した非接触状態での支持(もしくは保持)であってもよい。
As described above, the substrate loading hand 161A moves relative to the substrate holder 28A in the + X direction, that is, in the direction along the substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, in the direction parallel to the substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A. As the substrate P2 is retracted from below P2, a part of the substrate P2 is sequentially placed on the substrate holder 28A from the -X side. At this time, the area of the substrate P2 held by the substrate loading hand 161A decreases, and the area of the substrate P2 supported by the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A increases. Thus, the period until the tip of the substrate loading hand 161A on the -X side is moved to the + X side from the substrate holder 28A (that is, all the substrate loading hand 161A is from the space between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2). During at least a part of the time period until retraction, the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate holder 28A and the holding pad 184a simultaneously support (or hold) different portions of the substrate P2 respectively. In other words, during at least a part of the period, almost the entire surface of the substrate P2 is supported by the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate holder 28A and the holding pad 184a (an optional part of the substrate P2 is the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate holder 28A and (Supported by any of the holding pads 184a). The support (or holding) of the substrate P2 by the substrate loading hand 161A and the substrate holder 28A is not limited to being in a contact state, but is a support (or holding) in a non-contact state via a gas (air gap) It is also good.
また、上述のように基板搬入ハンド161Aの-X側の先端部が基板ホルダ28Aよりも+X側に移動されるまでの期間に、基板搬入ハンド161Aによる基板P2の被支持部分のZ軸方向(基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面と垂直な方向)に関する位置(Z位置)は、基板P2のうち保持パッド184aが保持している部分のZ位置よりも高くなっている。また、上述のように基板搬入ハンド161Aを基板P2と基板ホルダ28Aとの間の空間から+X方向へ退避させるにつれて、基板ホルダ28Aに支持された基板P2の被支持部分のZ軸方向の位置(Z位置)は次第に低下する。なお、基板P2の可撓性が低い(剛性を有し、撓み難い)場合には、基板搬入ハンド161Aを退避させるにつれて、基板P2が保持パッド184aに保持された部分を軸にθy方向に関して円運動をするように基板ホルダ28A上に着地するようになるが、この場合にも基板搬入ハンド161Aによる基板P2の被支持部分のZ位置は漸次に低下する。さらに、基板ホルダ28Aに支持された基板P2の被支持部分のX軸方向に関する位置(X位置)は、次第に+X方向へ移動される。
Also, as described above, the Z-axis direction of the supported portion of the substrate P2 by the substrate loading hand 161A during the period until the tip of the substrate loading hand 161A on the −X side is moved to the + X side from the substrate holder 28A ( The position (Z position) with respect to the direction perpendicular to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A is higher than the Z position of the portion of the substrate P2 held by the holding pad 184a. In addition, as the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from the space between the substrate P2 and the substrate holder 28A in the + X direction as described above, the position in the Z-axis direction of the supported portion of the substrate P2 supported by the substrate holder 28A ( Z position) decreases gradually. In the case where the flexibility of the substrate P2 is low (has rigidity and is difficult to bend), the portion in which the substrate P2 is held by the holding pad 184a is a circle with respect to the θy direction as the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted. It comes to land on the substrate holder 28A so as to exercise, but also in this case, the Z position of the supported portion of the substrate P2 by the substrate loading hand 161A gradually decreases. Further, the position (X position) of the supported portion of the substrate P2 supported by the substrate holder 28A in the X axis direction is gradually moved in the + X direction.
また、上述のように基板搬入ハンド161Aが基板P2の下方から退避するに伴い、基板P2が-X側から順々に基板ホルダ28A上に載置されていく際に、不図示の位置計測装置によって、基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板P2の位置が計測される。その計測結果に基づいて、一対の基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aそれぞれの保持パッド184aが、X軸方向およびY軸方向の少なくとも一方に駆動される。これにより、基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板P2のX軸方向位置、Y軸方向位置、及びθz方向の角度が調整される。θz方向の回転調整を行う場合は、それぞれの保持パッド184aを互いに異なる量だけ駆動すればよい。なお、不図示の位置計測装置は、例えば、ステージ装置20A(例えば、基板ホルダ28A、基板テーブル24)あるいは露光装置10Aが備える不図示のコラム等の構造体の少なくとも一方に配置するとよい。
Further, as described above, when the substrate loading hand 161A retracts from the lower side of the substrate P2 and the substrate P2 is sequentially mounted on the substrate holder 28A from the -X side, a position measurement device (not shown) Thus, the position of the substrate P2 relative to the substrate holder 28A is measured. Based on the measurement result, the holding pad 184a of each of the pair of substrate loading bearer devices 182A is driven in at least one of the X axis direction and the Y axis direction. Thus, the position in the X-axis direction, the position in the Y-axis direction, and the angle in the θz direction of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28A are adjusted. When the rotational adjustment in the θz direction is performed, the respective holding pads 184 a may be driven by different amounts. A position measurement device (not shown) may be disposed, for example, on at least one of the stage device 20A (for example, the substrate holder 28A and the substrate table 24) or a structure such as a column (not shown) provided in the exposure device 10A.
基板搬入ハンド161Aから基板ホルダ28Aに受け渡された基板P2は、図8(a)に示すように、保持パッド184aにより吸着把持されている部分を除き、基板ホルダ28A上に載置される。なお、保持パッド184aをZ軸方向へ駆動し、基板P2を基板ホルダ28Aへ受け渡す動作を補助するようにしてもよい。このとき、基板ホルダ28Aからの加圧気体の給気(噴出)が空気抵抗となり、基板P2が直接基板ホルダ28Aに衝突されることを防ぐことができ、基板P2の破損を防ぐことができる。また基板ホルダ28Aからの加圧気体の給気(噴出)を行われなくとも、基板ホルダ28Aの上面と基板P2との間の空気が空気抵抗となり、上述の効果が得られる。その後、基板ホルダ28Aからの加圧気体の給気(噴出)を停止することで、基板P2は基板ホルダ28Aの上面TSに着地し、上面TSに接触した状態となる。これにより、基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板P2のX軸方向位置、Y軸方向位置、及びθz方向の角度が変化されなくなる。
As shown in FIG. 8A, the substrate P2 transferred from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate holder 28A is placed on the substrate holder 28A except for the portion suctioned and held by the holding pad 184a. The holding pad 184a may be driven in the Z-axis direction to assist the operation of delivering the substrate P2 to the substrate holder 28A. At this time, the supply (spray) of pressurized gas from the substrate holder 28A is an air resistance, so that the substrate P2 can be prevented from directly colliding with the substrate holder 28A, and breakage of the substrate P2 can be prevented. Further, even if the pressurized gas is not supplied (jetted) from the substrate holder 28A, the air between the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 becomes air resistance, and the above-described effect is obtained. Thereafter, by stopping the supply (spray) of pressurized gas from the substrate holder 28A, the substrate P2 lands on the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28A and comes into contact with the upper surface TS. As a result, the position in the X-axis direction, the position in the Y-axis direction, and the angle in the θz direction of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28A are not changed.
また、ビームユニット152は、基板P1に対する加圧気体の噴出を停止する。基板搬出ハンド170Aは、基板P1の把持を解放する。
Further, the beam unit 152 stops the ejection of the pressurized gas to the substrate P1. The substrate unloading hand 170A releases the gripping of the substrate P1.
基板搬出ハンド170Aが基板P1の把持を解放した後、基板搬送部160Aが上昇駆動される。基板P1が載置されたビームユニット152は、外部搬送装置300に対する基板受け渡し位置へと移動される。
After the substrate unloading hand 170A releases the gripping of the substrate P1, the substrate transport unit 160A is driven to ascend. The beam unit 152 on which the substrate P1 is mounted is moved to the substrate delivery position with respect to the external transfer device 300.
図8(b)に示すように、基板ホルダ28A上に基板P2が載置されると、保持パッド184aは基板P2の吸着把持を解除し、基板P2の下方から退避するよう-X方向へ移動する。これにより、基板P2のうち、保持パッド184aに保持されていた部分が、基板ホルダ28Aの上面に載置される。
As shown in FIG. 8B, when the substrate P2 is placed on the substrate holder 28A, the holding pad 184a moves in the -X direction so as to release the suction gripping of the substrate P2 and withdraw from the lower side of the substrate P2. Do. Thus, the portion of the substrate P2 held by the holding pad 184a is placed on the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A.
外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドは、ビームユニット152よりも低いZ位置で-X方向に駆動され、ビームユニット152の下方に配置される。
The robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is driven in the −X direction at a Z position lower than the beam unit 152, and is disposed below the beam unit 152.
その後、図8(c)に示すように、ステージ装置20Aは、基板ホルダ28Aにより基板P2を吸着保持したまま所定の露光開始位置へと移動する。基板P2に対する露光動作時のステージ装置20Aの動作については、説明を省略する。
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8C, the stage device 20A moves to a predetermined exposure start position while holding the substrate P2 by suction by the substrate holder 28A. The description of the operation of the stage device 20A at the time of the exposure operation to the substrate P2 is omitted.
一方、外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドは上昇移動され、ビームユニット152上の基板P1を下から掬い取る。露光済みの基板P1を保持した外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドは、+X方向へ移動され露光装置10A内から退出する。
On the other hand, the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 is moved upward, and scoops the substrate P1 on the beam unit 152 from below. The robot hand of the external transfer device 300 holding the exposed substrate P1 is moved in the + X direction and exits the exposure device 10A.
その後、ポート部150Aでは、基板搬入ハンド161Aとの接触を避けるためにビームユニット152が-X方向へ移動され、基板搬入ハンド161Aが+X方向へ移動される。
Thereafter, in the port unit 150A, the beam unit 152 is moved in the −X direction to avoid contact with the substrate loading hand 161A, and the substrate loading hand 161A is moved in the + X direction.
露光済みの基板P1が、例えばコータ/デベロッパなどの外部装置(不図示)に受け渡された後、外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドは、基板P2の次に露光が行われる予定の基板P3を保持してポート部150Aに向けて移動される。
After the exposed substrate P1 is transferred to an external device (not shown) such as, for example, a coater / developer, the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 holds the substrate P3 on which the exposure is to be performed next to the substrate P2. Then, it is moved toward the port unit 150A.
そして、図4(a)で説明したように、外部搬送装置300によって新しい基板P3がポート部150Aへ運ばれてくるまでに、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面が、ビームユニット152の下面よりも下方に位置するように、基板搬送部160Aは降下移動(-Z方向に移動)される。このように、図4(a)~図8(c)に示す動作を繰り返すことにより、複数の基板Pに対し、露光動作などを連続して行うことができる。
Then, as described in FIG. 4A, the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is lower than the lower surface of the beam unit 152 until the new substrate P3 is transported to the port 150A by the external transfer device 300. The substrate transfer unit 160A is lowered (moved in the -Z direction) so as to be positioned. Thus, by repeating the operations shown in FIGS. 4A to 8C, the exposure operation and the like can be continuously performed on a plurality of substrates P.
以上詳細に説明したように、基板P2は、基板搬入ハンド161Aのみに保持されていた状態から、基板搬入ハンド161Aと保持パッド184aとに保持された状態となる。そして、基板P2は、基板搬入ハンド161Aが基板ホルダ28Aに対して相対移動するにつれて、基板搬入ハンド161Aと基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと基板ホルダ28Aとに保持される。そして、図7(c)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161AのX軸方向位置が基板ホルダ28Aと重ならない位置まで基板搬入ハンド161Aが移動されると、基板P2は、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと基板ホルダ28Aとにより保持され、最後には、基板ホルダ28Aにのみ支持される。基板P2は、基板搬入ハンド161Aと基板ホルダ28Aと保持パッド184aとのいずれかにより保持された状態で、基板ホルダ28Aへ搬入される。
As described above in detail, the substrate P2 is held by the substrate loading hand 161A and the holding pad 184a from the state held only by the substrate loading hand 161A. Then, the substrate P2 is held by the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate loading bearer device 182A, and the substrate holder 28A as the substrate loading hand 161A moves relative to the substrate holder 28A. Then, as shown in FIG. 7C, when the substrate loading hand 161A is moved to a position where the position of the substrate loading hand 161A in the X-axis direction does not overlap with the substrate holder 28A, the substrate P2 is moved with the substrate loading bearer device 182A. It is held by the substrate holder 28A and finally supported only by the substrate holder 28A. The substrate P2 is carried into the substrate holder 28A while being held by any one of the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate holder 28A and the holding pad 184a.
以上詳細に説明したように、基板ホルダ28Aから基板P1を搬出する動作と、基板ホルダ28Aへ基板P2を搬入する動作とを、少なくとも一部並行して行うことができ、基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板交換の時間を短くすることができる。また、基板ホルダ28Aへ基板P2を搬入する際に、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板ホルダ28Aの上空(+Z側の空間)を移動するため、その移動経路上に干渉するものがなく、すばやく基板搬入ハンド161Aを駆動させることができる。これにより、基板ホルダ28Aへ基板P2を搬入する動作を迅速に行えるため、基板交換時間を短くすることができる。また、基板搬入ハンド161Aを、基板ホルダ28Aの上空で+X側へ移動させる動作により、基板ホルダ28Aから基板P1を搬出しつつ、基板ホルダ28Aへ基板P2を搬入することができる。つまり、基板搬入時と基板搬出時とで共通の駆動系が用いられるため、基板搬入時と基板搬出時とにそれぞれ別の駆動系を設ける必要がなく、駆動系の数を減らすことができる。
As described above in detail, the operation of unloading the substrate P1 from the substrate holder 28A and the operation of loading the substrate P2 into the substrate holder 28A can be performed at least partially in parallel, and the substrate exchange for the substrate holder 28A Time can be shortened. In addition, when the substrate P2 is carried into the substrate holder 28A, the substrate carry-in hand 161A moves above the substrate holder 28A (the space on the + Z side), so there is nothing to interfere on the moving path, and the substrate is carried in quickly. The hand 161A can be driven. As a result, the operation of loading the substrate P2 into the substrate holder 28A can be performed quickly, so that the substrate exchange time can be shortened. Further, the substrate P2 can be carried into the substrate holder 28A while carrying out the substrate P1 from the substrate holder 28A by the operation of moving the substrate loading hand 161A to the + X side above the substrate holder 28A. That is, since a common drive system is used at the time of substrate loading and at the time of substrate unloading, it is not necessary to provide separate drive systems at the time of substrate loading and at the time of substrate unloading, and the number of driving systems can be reduced.
以上詳細に説明したように、本第1実施形態によれば、基板P2を基板ホルダ28Aに搬送する基板搬送装置100Aにおいて、基板ホルダ28Aの上方で基板P2を保持する基板搬入ハンド161Aと、基板搬入ハンド161Aに保持された基板P2の一部を保持する基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと、基板搬入ハンド161Aが基板ホルダ28Aの上方から退避されるように、基板ホルダ28A及び基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと基板搬入ハンド161Aとの一方を他方に対して相対移動させるX軸駆動装置164と、を備え、基板ホルダ28Aと基板搬入ハンド161Aと基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aとは、X軸駆動装置164による相対移動中に基板P2を保持する。これにより、基板P2が-X側(ポート部150Aとは反対側)の端部から順に基板ホルダ28Aに載置されていくため、基板ホルダ28Aや基板P2に傷がつきにくく、接触による発塵が減少する。また、基板ホルダ28Aと基板P2との間に空気溜まりが発生しにくく、基板P2がしわになりにくい。また、基板P2が基板ホルダ28A上で移動してしまう事態を抑制できる。さらに、基板搬入ハンド161Aの退避状況(速度・位置)に応じて、基板P2の基板ホルダ28Aの載置をコントロール(例えば、途中で載置を停止させる)ことができる。そのため、基板搬入ハンド161Aから基板P2に対して摩擦を低減するために、加圧気体を噴出しなくてもよい。また、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aを上下に駆動させる機構を省略することができる。
As described above in detail, according to the first embodiment, in the substrate transfer apparatus 100A for transferring the substrate P2 to the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading hand 161A for holding the substrate P2 above the substrate holder 28A and the substrate The substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A holding a part of the substrate P2 held by the loading hand 161A, and the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A, and the substrate such that the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from above the substrate holder 28A. The substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading hand 161A, and the substrate loading bearer device 182A move relative to each other by the X-axis driving device 164. Hold the substrate P2. Thus, the substrate P2 is sequentially mounted on the substrate holder 28A from the end on the -X side (the side opposite to the port 150A), so that the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 are not easily damaged, and dust is generated due to contact Decreases. In addition, air stagnation is less likely to occur between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2, and the substrate P2 is less likely to be wrinkled. Further, the situation in which the substrate P2 moves on the substrate holder 28A can be suppressed. Further, the placement of the substrate holder 28A of the substrate P2 can be controlled (for example, the placement is stopped halfway) in accordance with the retracting condition (speed and position) of the substrate loading hand 161A. Therefore, in order to reduce friction from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate P2, the pressurized gas may not be jetted. Also, the mechanism for driving the substrate loading bearer device 182A up and down can be omitted.
また、本第1実施形態によれば、基板P2を基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面へ搬送する基板搬送装置100Aにおいて、ホルダ基板保持面の上方に設けられ、基板P2の一部とホルダ基板保持面との距離が基板P2の他部とホルダ基板保持面との距離よりも短い状態の基板P2を保持する基板搬入ハンド161Aと、基板搬入ハンド161Aに保持された基板P2の他部を保持する基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと、基板搬入ハンド161Aが基板ホルダ28Aの上方から退避されるように、基板ホルダ28A及び基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと基板搬入ハンド161Aとをホルダ基板保持面へ沿った方向へ相対移動させるX軸駆動装置164と、を備える。これにより、基板P2を-X側(ポート部150Aとは反対側)の端部から順に基板ホルダ28Aに載置していくことができるため、基板ホルダ28Aや基板P2に傷がつきにくく、接触による発塵が減少する。また、基板ホルダ28Aと基板P2との間に空気溜まりが発生しにくく、基板P2がしわになりにくい。また、基板P2が基板ホルダ28A上で移動してしまう事態を抑制できる。さらに、基板搬入ハンド161Aの退避状況(速度・位置)に応じて、基板P2の基板ホルダ28Aの載置をコントロール(例えば、途中で載置を停止させる)ことができる。そのため、基板搬入ハンド161Aから基板P2に対して摩擦を低減するために、加圧気体を噴出しなくてもよい。また、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aを上下に移動させる機構を省略することができる。
Further, according to the first embodiment, in the substrate transfer apparatus 100A for transferring the substrate P2 to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, the substrate P2 is provided above the holder substrate holding surface, and part of the substrate P2 and the holder substrate holding A substrate loading hand 161A for holding the substrate P2 in a state in which the distance to the surface is shorter than the distance between the other portion of the substrate P2 and the holder substrate holding surface, and the other portion of the substrate P2 held by the substrate loading hand 161A The substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading bearer device 182A, and the substrate loading hand 161A are relative to the direction along the holder substrate holding surface such that the substrate loading bearer device 182A and the substrate loading hand 161A are retracted from above the substrate holder 28A. And an X-axis drive device 164 for moving. Thus, the substrate P2 can be placed on the substrate holder 28A sequentially from the end on the -X side (the opposite side to the port 150A), so the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 are not easily damaged, and contact is made Dust generation due to In addition, air stagnation is less likely to occur between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2, and the substrate P2 is less likely to be wrinkled. Further, the situation in which the substrate P2 moves on the substrate holder 28A can be suppressed. Further, the placement of the substrate holder 28A of the substrate P2 can be controlled (for example, the placement is stopped halfway) in accordance with the retracting condition (speed and position) of the substrate loading hand 161A. Therefore, in order to reduce friction from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate P2, the pressurized gas may not be jetted. Further, the mechanism for moving the substrate loading bearer device 182A up and down can be omitted.
また、本第1実施形態によれば、基板P2を保持可能な基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面へ基板P2を搬送する基板搬送装置100Aにおいて、基板ホルダ28Aの上方で基板P2を保持する基板保持面を有する基板搬入ハンド161Aと、上下方向に関してホルダ基板保持面と基板保持面との間の位置で、基板搬入ハンド161Aに保持された基板P2の一部を保持する基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと、基板搬入ハンド161Aが基板ホルダ28Aの上方から退避されるように、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aが基板P2の一部を保持した状態で、基板ホルダ28A及び基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと基板搬入ハンド161Aとを相対移動させるX軸駆動装置164と、を備える。これにより、基板P2を-X側(ポート部150Aとは反対側)の端部から順に基板ホルダ28Aに載置していくことができるため、基板ホルダ28Aや基板P2に傷がつきにくく、接触による発塵が減少する。また、基板ホルダ28Aと基板P2との間に空気溜まりが発生しにくく、基板P2がしわになりにくい。また、基板P2が基板ホルダ28A上で移動してしまう事態を抑制できる。さらに、基板搬入ハンド161Aの退避状況(速度・位置)に応じて、基板P2の基板ホルダ28Aの載置をコントロール(例えば、途中で載置を停止させる)ことができる。そのため、基板搬入ハンド161Aから基板P2に対して摩擦を低減するために、加圧気体を噴出しなくてもよい。また、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aを上下に移動させる機構を省略することができる。
Further, according to the first embodiment, in the substrate transfer apparatus 100A for transferring the substrate P2 to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A capable of holding the substrate P2, the substrate holding device holds the substrate P2 above the substrate holder 28A. A substrate loading hand 161A having a surface, and a substrate loading bearer device 182A for holding a part of the substrate P2 held by the substrate loading hand 161A at a position between the holder substrate holding surface and the substrate holding surface in the vertical direction; In a state where the substrate loading bearer device 182A holds a part of the substrate P2 so that the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from above the substrate holder 28A, the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading bearer device 182A and the substrate loading hand 161A are And an X-axis drive device 164 for relative movement. Thus, the substrate P2 can be placed on the substrate holder 28A sequentially from the end on the -X side (the opposite side to the port 150A), so the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 are not easily damaged, and contact is made Dust generation due to In addition, air stagnation is less likely to occur between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2, and the substrate P2 is less likely to be wrinkled. Further, the situation in which the substrate P2 moves on the substrate holder 28A can be suppressed. Further, the placement of the substrate holder 28A of the substrate P2 can be controlled (for example, the placement is stopped halfway) in accordance with the retracting condition (speed and position) of the substrate loading hand 161A. Therefore, in order to reduce friction from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate P2, the pressurized gas may not be jetted. Further, the mechanism for moving the substrate loading bearer device 182A up and down can be omitted.
また、本第1実施形態によれば、基板P2を基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面に搬送する基板搬送装置100Aにおいて、基板ホルダ28Aの上方で基板P2を保持する基板搬入ハンド161Aと、基板搬入ハンド161Aに保持された基板P2の一部を保持する基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと、基板搬入ハンド161Aが基板ホルダ28Aの上方から退避されるように、基板ホルダ28A及び基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと基板搬入ハンド161Aとを、ホルダ基板保持面に沿う所定方向へ相対移動させるX軸駆動装置164と、を備え、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、X軸駆動装置164による相対移動中に、基板P2のうち基板搬入ハンド161Aに保持された領域の上下方向の位置が基板ホルダ28Aに近づくよう、基板P2を保持する。これにより、基板P2を-X側(ポート部150Aとは反対側)の端部から順に基板ホルダ28Aに載置していくことができるため、基板ホルダ28Aや基板P2に傷がつきにくく、接触による発塵が減少する。また、基板ホルダ28Aと基板P2との間に空気溜まりが発生しにくく、基板P2がしわになりにくい。また、基板P2が基板ホルダ28A上で移動してしまう事態を抑制できる。さらに、基板搬入ハンド161Aの退避状況(速度・位置)に応じて、基板P2の基板ホルダ28Aの載置をコントロール(例えば、途中で載置を停止させる)ことができる。そのため、基板搬入ハンド161Aから基板P2に対して摩擦を低減するために、加圧気体を噴出しなくてもよい。また、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aを上下に移動させる機構を省略することができる。
Further, according to the first embodiment, in the substrate transfer apparatus 100A for transferring the substrate P2 to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading hand 161A for holding the substrate P2 above the substrate holder 28A, and the substrate loading The substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A holding a part of the substrate P2 held by the hand 161A, and the substrate loading 28A and the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A and the substrate loading so that the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from above the substrate holder 28A. And a substrate loading hand 161A for loading a substrate P2 of the substrate P2 during relative movement by the X axis driving device 164. The X axis driving device 164 relatively moves the hand 161A in a predetermined direction along the holder substrate holding surface. The substrate P2 is set so that the vertical position of the region held by the hand 161A approaches the substrate holder 28A. To equity. Thus, the substrate P2 can be placed on the substrate holder 28A sequentially from the end on the -X side (the opposite side to the port 150A), so the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2 are not easily damaged, and contact is made Dust generation due to In addition, air stagnation is less likely to occur between the substrate holder 28A and the substrate P2, and the substrate P2 is less likely to be wrinkled. Further, the situation in which the substrate P2 moves on the substrate holder 28A can be suppressed. Further, the placement of the substrate holder 28A of the substrate P2 can be controlled (for example, the placement is stopped halfway) in accordance with the retracting condition (speed and position) of the substrate loading hand 161A. Therefore, in order to reduce friction from the substrate loading hand 161A to the substrate P2, the pressurized gas may not be jetted. Further, the mechanism for moving the substrate loading bearer device 182A up and down can be omitted.
また本第1実施形態において、基板搬入ハンド161Aの基板保持面は、ホルダ基板保持面に対して傾斜して設けられる。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Aが基板P2と基板ホルダ28Aとの間から退避する場合、基板搬入ハンド161Aは傾斜した基板P2の下面から離れる方向(基板P2の下面の接線方向とは異なる方向)に退避するため、接触摩耗を低減することができる。
In the first embodiment, the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is provided to be inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface. Thus, when the substrate loading hand 161A retracts from between the substrate P2 and the substrate holder 28A, the substrate loading hand 161A moves away from the lower surface of the inclined substrate P2 (different from the tangential direction of the lower surface of the substrate P2). Since it retracts, contact wear can be reduced.
また、本第1実施形態において、X軸駆動装置164は、基板ホルダ28Aが基板P2を保持する保持面に沿った方向へ、基板ホルダ28A及び基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと基板搬入ハンド161Aとの一方を他方に対して相対移動させる。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Aは傾斜した基板P2の下面から離れる方向(基板P2の下面の接線方向とは異なる方向)に退避するため、接触摩耗を低減することができる。
In the first embodiment, the X-axis drive device 164 is one of the substrate holder 28A, the substrate carry-in bearer device 182A, and the substrate carry-in hand 161A in the direction along the holding surface where the substrate holder 28A holds the substrate P2. Move relative to the other. Thus, the substrate loading hand 161A retracts in a direction away from the lower surface of the inclined substrate P2 (a direction different from the tangential direction of the lower surface of the substrate P2), so that contact wear can be reduced.
また、本第1実施形態において、X軸駆動装置164は、基板搬入ハンド161Aを基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面と平行な方向に移動する。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Aは傾斜した基板P2の下面から離れる方向(基板P2の下面の接線方向とは異なる水平方向)に退避するため、接触摩耗を低減することができる。
Further, in the first embodiment, the X-axis drive device 164 moves the substrate loading hand 161A in a direction parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A. As a result, the substrate loading hand 161A retracts in a direction away from the lower surface of the inclined substrate P2 (horizontal direction different from the tangential direction of the lower surface of the substrate P2), so that contact wear can be reduced.
(第1変形例)
第1変形例は、基板搬送装置の構成を変更した例である。具体的には、第1変形例に係る露光装置10Bの基板搬送装置100Bは、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面が基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面と平行な状態と、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面が基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面に対して傾斜した状態とを切り替える駆動系を備えている。 (First modification)
The first modification is an example in which the configuration of the substrate transfer apparatus is changed. Specifically, in thesubstrate transfer apparatus 100B of the exposure apparatus 10B according to the first modification, the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, and the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is a substrate A drive system is provided which switches between the holder 28A and the holder substrate holding surface.
第1変形例は、基板搬送装置の構成を変更した例である。具体的には、第1変形例に係る露光装置10Bの基板搬送装置100Bは、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面が基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面と平行な状態と、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面が基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面に対して傾斜した状態とを切り替える駆動系を備えている。 (First modification)
The first modification is an example in which the configuration of the substrate transfer apparatus is changed. Specifically, in the
第1変形例に係る基板搬送装置100Bを用いた、基板ホルダ28A上の基板Pの交換動作について、図9(a)~図9(c)を用いて説明する。
The exchange operation of the substrate P on the substrate holder 28A using the substrate transfer apparatus 100B according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (c).
なお、図9(a)の状態は、第1実施形態における図5(a)の後、ステージ装置20Aがポート部150Aとの基板受け渡し位置に配置された状態を示している。
The state of FIG. 9A shows a state in which the stage device 20A is disposed at the substrate delivery position with the port portion 150A after the state of FIG. 5A in the first embodiment.
図9(a)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161A上に基板P2が載置されている。このとき、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面は、基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面と平行な状態となっている。
As shown in FIG. 9A, the substrate P2 is placed on the substrate loading hand 161A. At this time, the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A.
その後、図9(b)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面を基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面と略平行に保ったまま、基板P2を下方から支持した基板搬入ハンド161Aが、-X方向に駆動される。なお、ステージ装置20A、基板搬入ベアラ装置182A、基板搬出ベアラ装置183A、及びオフセットビーム185aの各動作は、図5(c)で説明した動作と同様であるため、説明を省略する。
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9B, the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 from the lower side holds the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A substantially parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A, -X. Driven in the direction. The operations of the stage device 20A, the substrate loading bearer device 182A, the substrate unloading bearer device 183A, and the offset beam 185a are the same as the operations described with reference to FIG.
その後、基板P2を下方から支持した基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板ホルダ28Aの上空における所定位置に配置される。
Thereafter, the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 from below is disposed at a predetermined position above the substrate holder 28A.
そして、図9(c)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Aは上昇駆動されながら、その先端が下方に傾くよう駆動される。つまり、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面が基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面に対して傾斜した状態となるよう駆動される。これにより、基板P2の先端が、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接触する。保持パッド184aは、該基板P2の-X側の端部近傍を吸着保持する。なお、基板搬入ハンド161Aは、その先端が下方に傾くよう駆動されたとしても、その先端が基板ホルダ28Aの上面と接触する恐れがないZ位置で、基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面と平行に保ったまま-X方向に移動するようにしてもよい。
Then, as shown in FIG. 9C, while the substrate loading hand 161A is driven to rise, it is driven to tilt its tip downward. That is, the substrate loading hand 161A is driven such that the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A is inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A. Thereby, the tip of the substrate P2 contacts the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A. The holding pad 184a suction-holds the vicinity of the end on the -X side of the substrate P2. The substrate loading hand 161A is parallel to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A at the Z position where there is no risk that the tip contacts the upper surface of the substrate holder 28A even if the front end is driven to tilt downward. You may make it move to-X direction, maintaining it.
以降の動作は、第1実施形態とほぼ同様であるため、説明を省略する。
The subsequent operation is substantially the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
第1変形例によれば、ポート部150Aと基板搬入ハンド161Aとの基板P2の受け渡し時に、ポート部150Aの基板載置面と基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面とが平行の状態で基板P2を一方から他方へ受け渡すことができるため、基板受け渡し時における基板P2の破損の可能性を少なくすることができる。
According to the first modification, when the substrate P2 is transferred between the port 150A and the substrate loading hand 161A, the substrate P2 is placed from one side with the substrate mounting surface of the port 150A parallel to the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A. Since it can be delivered to the other, the possibility of breakage of the substrate P2 at the time of substrate delivery can be reduced.
また、基板P2を下方から支持した基板搬入ハンド161Aが、-X方向に移動される際に、ポート部150A及び基板ホルダ28Aと基板搬入ハンド161AとのZ方向の距離を長くすることができる。その結果、基板搬入ハンド161Aが-X方向へ移動されているときに、ポート部150A及び/又は基板ホルダ28Aと基板搬入ハンド161Aとが接触する恐れが低くなる。
Further, when the substrate loading hand 161A supporting the substrate P2 from below is moved in the −X direction, the distance between the port 150A and the substrate holder 28A and the substrate loading hand 161A in the Z direction can be increased. As a result, when the substrate loading hand 161A is moved in the −X direction, the risk of the port portion 150A and / or the substrate holder 28A and the substrate loading hand 161A coming into contact is reduced.
なお、基板搬入ハンド161Aの上面と基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面との傾斜角度を徐々に変更させながら、基板搬入ハンド161Aを、基板ホルダ28Aに対して、+X方向へ相対移動させてもよい。
The substrate loading hand 161A may be moved relative to the substrate holder 28A in the + X direction while gradually changing the inclination angle between the upper surface of the substrate loading hand 161A and the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A. .
第1変形例のように、基板搬入ハンド161Aを傾けることにより、基板搬入ハンド161Aの基板保持面が基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面に対して傾斜するようにしてもよい。
As in the first modification, the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161A may be inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A by inclining the substrate loading hand 161A.
(第2変形例)
第2変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの指部の形状を変えた例である。図10(a)は第2変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Cの斜視図であり、図10(b)は第2変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Cの側面図である。 (2nd modification)
The second modification is an example in which the shape of the finger of the substrate loading hand is changed. FIG. 10A is a perspective view of asubstrate loading hand 161C according to a second modification, and FIG. 10B is a side view of a substrate loading hand 161C according to the second modification.
第2変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの指部の形状を変えた例である。図10(a)は第2変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Cの斜視図であり、図10(b)は第2変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Cの側面図である。 (2nd modification)
The second modification is an example in which the shape of the finger of the substrate loading hand is changed. FIG. 10A is a perspective view of a
図10(a)及び図10(b)に示すように、第2変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Cにおいて、指部162Cは、+X側端部が厚く-X側端部に近づくほど薄くなるXZ断面三角形状を有する。
As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in the substrate loading hand 161C according to the second modification, the finger portion 162C is thicker at the + X side end and thinner as it approaches the −X side end. It has a triangular shape in cross section.
なお、基板ホルダ28A上の基板の交換動作については、第1実施形態と同様であるため、説明を省略する。
The operation of replacing the substrate on the substrate holder 28A is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
第2変形例のように、基板搬入ハンドの指部の形状を+X側端部が厚く-X側端部に近づくほど薄くなるXZ断面三角形状としてもよい。これにより、基板搬入ハンドの指部の剛性が向上することで、基板搬入ハンド161Cを移動させるときに基板搬入ハンド161Cがふらつくことと、またそのふらつきによって基板搬入ハンド161Cと基板ホルダ28Aとが接触する恐れとを低減することができる。また、第1変形例のような基板搬入ハンド161Aを基板ホルダ28Aに対して傾斜させる(図9(c)参照)駆動機構を省略することができる。
As in the second modification, the shape of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand may be a triangular XZ cross-section, which becomes thinner toward the + X side end and closer to the −X side end. Thereby, the rigidity of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand is improved, and the substrate loading hand 161C is shaken when moving the substrate loading hand 161C, and the substrate loading hand 161C and the substrate holder 28A are in contact due to the fluctuation. To reduce the risk of Further, the drive mechanism for inclining the substrate loading hand 161A as in the first modification with respect to the substrate holder 28A (see FIG. 9C) can be omitted.
(第3変形例)
第1実施形態では、基板搬入ハンドが基板ホルダ28A上空の所定位置まで移動された後、降下移動されることによって基板P2の先端を、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接触させていた。第3変形例では、基板搬出ハンド170Aを用いて、基板P2の先端を、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接触させる。 (Third modification)
In the first embodiment, after the substrate loading hand is moved to a predetermined position above thesubstrate holder 28A, the tip of the substrate P2 is brought into contact with the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A by being moved downward. In the third modification, the front end of the substrate P2 is brought into contact with the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A using the substrate unloading hand 170A.
第1実施形態では、基板搬入ハンドが基板ホルダ28A上空の所定位置まで移動された後、降下移動されることによって基板P2の先端を、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接触させていた。第3変形例では、基板搬出ハンド170Aを用いて、基板P2の先端を、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接触させる。 (Third modification)
In the first embodiment, after the substrate loading hand is moved to a predetermined position above the
第3変形例に係る基板搬送装置100Dを用いた、基板ホルダ28A上の基板Pの交換動作について、図11(a)及び図11(b)を用いて説明する。なお、図11(a)は第1実施形態の図6(a)の状態と対応し、図11(b)は第1実施形態の図6(b)の状態と対応する。
The exchange operation of the substrate P on the substrate holder 28A using the substrate transfer apparatus 100D according to the third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b). 11 (a) corresponds to the state of FIG. 6 (a) of the first embodiment, and FIG. 11 (b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 6 (b) of the first embodiment.
図11(a)及び図11(b)に示すように、第3変形例に係る基板搬送装置100Dにおいて、基板搬送部160Dは、第2変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Cと、基板搬出ハンド170Aと、を備える。
As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, in the substrate transfer apparatus 100D according to the third modification, the substrate transfer unit 160D includes a substrate loading hand 161C according to the second variation and a substrate output hand 170A. And.
図11(a)に示すように、第3変形例では、基板搬入ハンド161Cのステージ装置20Aとの基板受け渡し位置が、図6(a)における基板搬入ハンド161Aの基板受け渡し位置よりも+X側の位置となっている。
As shown in FIG. 11A, in the third modification, the substrate delivery position of the substrate loading hand 161C with the stage device 20A is on the + X side of the substrate delivery position of the substrate loading hand 161A in FIG. 6A. It is in position.
そして、基板搬入ハンド161Cが基板受け渡し位置に到達すると、基板P2の下面を吸着把持した基板搬出ハンド170Aは、図11(b)に示すように、腕を伸ばすように駆動される。これにより、基板P2が基板搬入ハンド161Cに沿って滑り下り、基板P2の先端が、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接触する。
Then, when the substrate loading hand 161C reaches the substrate delivery position, the substrate unloading hand 170A holding the lower surface of the substrate P2 by suction is driven so as to extend the arm, as shown in FIG. 11 (b). Thereby, the substrate P2 slides down along the substrate loading hand 161C, and the tip of the substrate P2 contacts the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182A.
なお、このとき、基板搬入ハンド161Cの指部162Cの上面に取り付けられている支持パッド164Dは、基板の動きをスムーズにするために、指部162Cの延伸方向に延びる棒状であることが好ましい。また、基板P2を滑らせるときに、支持パッド164Dから加圧気体を噴出するようにしてもよい。
At this time, the support pad 164D attached to the upper surface of the finger portion 162C of the substrate loading hand 161C is preferably in the shape of a bar extending in the extending direction of the finger portion 162C in order to smooth the movement of the substrate. Further, when the substrate P2 is slid, the pressurized gas may be ejected from the support pad 164D.
なお、基板搬送部160Dは、基板搬出ハンド170Aを複数備えるようにしてもよい。複数の基板搬出ハンド170Aのうちその一部により、基板P2の先端を保持パッド184aに接触させつつ、残りの基板搬出ハンド170Aにより、基板ホルダ28A上の露光済み基板P1を保持するようにしてもよい。これにより、基板P2の先端が保持パッド184aに保持され、残りの基板搬出ハンド170Aにより露光済み基板P1が保持されると、基板搬入ハンド161Cを+X方向に移動させ 、基板搬入動作と基板搬出動作とを並列して行うことができる。
The substrate transport unit 160D may include a plurality of substrate unloading hands 170A. The exposed substrate P1 on the substrate holder 28A is held by the remaining substrate carry-out hand 170A while the tip of the substrate P2 is in contact with the holding pad 184a by a part of the plurality of substrate carry-out hands 170A. Good. Thus, when the tip of the substrate P2 is held by the holding pad 184a and the exposed substrate P1 is held by the remaining substrate carry-out hand 170A, the substrate carry-in hand 161C is moved in the + X direction to carry out the substrate carry-in operation and the substrate carry-out operation. And can be done in parallel.
第3変形例によれば、基板搬送部160D全体を動かすのではなく、基板搬出ハンド170Aにより基板P2のみを降下させるので、基板搬送部160D全体を動かすよりも位置決めを容易かつ正確に行うことができる。また、基板搬送部160DのX軸方向のストロークを短縮することができる。また、基板P2は重力の作用により撓むため、基板搬入ハンド161CのX軸方向の移動距離を基板搬入ハンド161Cの勾配による基板P2の水平移動成分よりも短くしても、基板P2の先端を基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接近させることができる。
According to the third modification, only the substrate P2 is lowered by the substrate carry-out hand 170A instead of moving the entire substrate transfer unit 160D, so positioning can be performed more easily and accurately than when the entire substrate transfer unit 160D is moved. it can. In addition, the stroke in the X axis direction of the substrate transfer unit 160D can be shortened. Further, since the substrate P2 is bent by the action of gravity, the tip of the substrate P2 can be shortened even if the movement distance of the substrate loading hand 161C in the X-axis direction is shorter than the horizontal movement component of the substrate P2 due to the gradient of the substrate loading hand 161C It can be made to approach holding pad 184a of substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A.
なお、図11(a)及び図11(b)の説明では、第2変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Cを用いているが、第1実施形態に係る基板搬入ハンド161Aを用いてもよい。
In the description of FIGS. 11A and 11B, the substrate loading hand 161C according to the second modification is used, but the substrate loading hand 161A according to the first embodiment may be used.
(第4変形例)
第4変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの構成を変えた例である。図12(a)は、第4変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Eの上面図、図12(b)は図12(a)のA-A断面図である。 (4th modification)
The fourth modified example is an example in which the configuration of the substrate loading hand is changed. FIG. 12 (a) is a top view of asubstrate loading hand 161E according to a fourth modification, and FIG. 12 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 12 (a).
第4変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの構成を変えた例である。図12(a)は、第4変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Eの上面図、図12(b)は図12(a)のA-A断面図である。 (4th modification)
The fourth modified example is an example in which the configuration of the substrate loading hand is changed. FIG. 12 (a) is a top view of a
図12(a)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Eは、複数の指部162Eのうち、Y軸方向の両端の指部162E1がベルト部166を備える。図12(b)に示すように、ベルト部166は、ベルト166aと、一対のプーリ166bとを備える。ベルト166aは基板P2の裏面と接触するように、その上面が指部162E1に設置された支持パッド164Eの上面と略同一面を形成するように、指部162E1の上面とほぼ平行に配置されている。ベルト166aは、滑り難い摩擦係数の大きな材料からなり、例えばステンレス鋼にウレタンコーティングしたものやシリコン、ゴム、又は軟質PVC(ポリ塩化ビニル)などから選ばれる。
As shown in FIG. 12A, in the substrate loading hand 161E, finger portions 162E1 at both ends in the Y-axis direction among the plurality of finger portions 162E include the belt portion 166. As shown in FIG. 12B, the belt portion 166 includes a belt 166a and a pair of pulleys 166b. The belt 166a is disposed substantially parallel to the upper surface of the finger portion 162E1 so that the upper surface thereof forms substantially the same surface as the upper surface of the support pad 164E disposed on the finger portion 162E1 so as to contact the back surface of the substrate P2. There is. The belt 166a is made of a material having a large non-slip coefficient of friction, and is selected from, for example, urethane-coated stainless steel, silicon, rubber, or flexible PVC (polyvinyl chloride).
図13(a)及び図13(b)は、基板搬入ハンド161Eを用いた基板P2の基板ホルダ28Aへの搬入動作を示す図である。
FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are diagrams showing the loading operation of the substrate P2 into the substrate holder 28A using the substrate loading hand 161E.
図13(a)に示すように、基板P2の先端を、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aに接触させた後、保持パッド184aが基板P2の先端を保持した状態で、基板搬入ハンド161Eを基板ホルダ28Aに対して+X方向に相対移動させる。すると、ベルト166aが摩擦係数の大きな材料からできているため、図13(b)に示すように、基板P2と接触しているベルト166aは基板P2の基板搬入ハンド161Eに対する相対移動と共に一対のプーリ166bによって循環移動する。これにより、ベルト166aは、基板P2のY軸方向位置を拘束した状態のまま基板搬入ハンド161E上を斜めに降下する。したがって、基板P2は、基板P2全体が基板搬入ハンド161Eから離れる直前まで、ベルト166aにより拘束された状態で、基板ホルダ28Aに搬入される。
As shown in FIG. 13A, after the tip of the substrate P2 is brought into contact with the holding pad 184a of the substrate carrying bearer apparatus 182A, the substrate loading hand 161E is held in a state where the holding pad 184a holds the tip of the substrate P2. The substrate holder 28A is relatively moved in the + X direction. Then, since the belt 166a is made of a material having a large coefficient of friction, as shown in FIG. 13B, the belt 166a in contact with the substrate P2 has a pair of pulleys together with the relative movement of the substrate P2 to the substrate loading hand 161E. It moves circularly by 166b. As a result, the belt 166a descends obliquely on the substrate loading hand 161E while keeping the position of the substrate P2 in the Y-axis direction restrained. Therefore, the substrate P2 is carried into the substrate holder 28A in a state of being restrained by the belt 166a until immediately before the entire substrate P2 leaves the substrate carrying hand 161E.
第1実施形態及び第1~第3変形例では、基板P2の-X側端部を基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aの保持パッド184aが保持した状態で、基板搬入ハンドを+X方向に移動(退避)させる(例えば、図6(c)等)。このとき、基板P2の-X側端部以外の部分は、基板ホルダ28Aに支持されるまで、Y軸方向の動きが拘束されていない状態にある。
In the first embodiment and the first to third modifications, the substrate loading hand is moved (retracted) in the + X direction, with the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer apparatus 182A holding the substrate P2 at the -X side end. (For example, FIG.6 (c) etc.). At this time, the movement of the Y-axis direction is not restricted until the portion other than the −X side end of the substrate P2 is supported by the substrate holder 28A.
一方、第4変形例では、基板P2の-X側端部を保持パッド184aが保持した状態で、基板搬入ハンド161Eを+X方向に移動している間、+X側端部を基板搬入ハンド161Eで把持してY軸方向の動きを拘束したまま、基板P2を基板ホルダ28Aに載置する。したがって、第4変形例によれば、基板P2全体が基板搬入ハンド161Eから離れる直前まで基板P2を拘束しておくことができるため、基板P2の載置ずれを防ぐことができる。
On the other hand, in the fourth modification, while the substrate loading hand 161E is moved in the + X direction with the holding pad 184a holding the −X side edge of the substrate P2, the + X side edge is transferred by the substrate loading hand 161E. The substrate P2 is placed on the substrate holder 28A while holding and restraining the movement in the Y-axis direction. Therefore, according to the fourth modification, the substrate P2 can be restrained until immediately before the entire substrate P2 leaves the substrate loading hand 161E, so that the mounting displacement of the substrate P2 can be prevented.
なお、ベルト部166はモータ等によって送りを制御するようにしてもよい。この場合、基板搬入ハンド161Eを後退させるタイミングと同期してベルト166aを送り出すようにすればよい。また、この場合、ベルト166aはエンドレスベルトでなくてもよい。また、両端の指部162E1が備える各ベルト166aをそれぞれ独立に移動すれば、基板搬入ハンド161E上で、基板ホルダ28Aに対する基板P2の相対位置調整(アライメント)を行うことができる。
The belt unit 166 may control the feed by a motor or the like. In this case, the belt 166a may be fed out in synchronization with the timing at which the substrate loading hand 161E is moved backward. Also, in this case, the belt 166a may not be an endless belt. In addition, if the belts 166a of the finger portions 162E1 at both ends are moved independently, relative position adjustment (alignment) of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28A can be performed on the substrate loading hand 161E.
(第5変形例)
第5変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの指部の構成を変更するものである。図14(a)及び図14(b)は、第5変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Fを概略的に示す断面図である。 (5th modification)
The fifth modification is to change the configuration of the finger of the substrate loading hand. FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B are cross sectional views schematically showing asubstrate loading hand 161F according to the fifth modification.
第5変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの指部の構成を変更するものである。図14(a)及び図14(b)は、第5変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Fを概略的に示す断面図である。 (5th modification)
The fifth modification is to change the configuration of the finger of the substrate loading hand. FIG. 14A and FIG. 14B are cross sectional views schematically showing a
図14(a)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Fの指部162Fは、第1指部162F1と、第2指部162F2とを有する。第1指部162F1は中空となっており、内部に第2指部162F2を移動するためのワイヤロープ169Aが配置されている。第2指部162F2は、ピン169B等を介してY軸まわりに回転可能に第1指部162F1に連結されている。また、第2指部162F2には、ワイヤロープ169Aが接続されている。不図示の駆動装置によってワイヤロープ169Aを移動することにより、第2指部162F2は、ピン169Bを支点としてY軸まわりに回転する。これにより、第2指部162F2に保持された基板P2の一部の領域のみを、基板ホルダ28Aのホルダ基板保持面に対して傾斜させることができる。
As shown in FIG. 14A, the finger portion 162F of the substrate loading hand 161F has a first finger portion 162F1 and a second finger portion 162F2. The first finger portion 162F1 is hollow, and a wire rope 169A for moving the second finger portion 162F2 is disposed therein. The second finger portion 162F2 is coupled to the first finger portion 162F1 rotatably around the Y axis via a pin 169B and the like. In addition, a wire rope 169A is connected to the second finger portion 162F2. By moving the wire rope 169A by a drive device (not shown), the second finger portion 162F2 rotates around the Y axis with the pin 169B as a fulcrum. Thereby, only a partial region of the substrate P2 held by the second finger portion 162F2 can be inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28A.
その他の構成は、第1実施形態と同様であるため、説明を省略する。
The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.
なお、基板搬入ハンド161Fは、ワイヤロープ169Aによる駆動機構を有さず、第2指部162F2が第1指部162F1に対して常に傾斜していてもよい。
The substrate loading hand 161F may not have a drive mechanism by the wire rope 169A, and the second finger portion 162F2 may always be inclined with respect to the first finger portion 162F1.
第5変形例によれば、第1変形例のような基板搬入ハンド161Aを傾斜させる(図9(c)参照)駆動機構を省略することができる。また、第2指部162F2の先端部を薄くすることができる。
According to the fifth modification, the drive mechanism for tilting the substrate loading hand 161A as in the first modification (see FIG. 9C) can be omitted. In addition, the tip of the second finger portion 162F2 can be thinned.
≪第2実施形態≫
次に、第2実施形態に係る露光装置ついて、図15(a)~図25(b)を用いて説明する。第2実施形態に係る露光装置10Gの構成は、基板搬送装置の一部の構成及び動作が異なる点を除き、上記第1実施形態と同じであるので、以下、相違点についてのみ説明し、上記第1実施形態と同じ構成及び機能を有する要素については、上記第1実施形態と同じ符号を付してその説明を省略する。 Second Embodiment
Next, an exposure apparatus according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 (a) to 25 (b). The configuration of theexposure apparatus 10G according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the configuration and operation of a part of the substrate transfer apparatus are different, so only the differences will be described below. About the element which has the same structure and function as 1st Embodiment, the same code | symbol as the said 1st Embodiment is attached | subjected, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.
次に、第2実施形態に係る露光装置ついて、図15(a)~図25(b)を用いて説明する。第2実施形態に係る露光装置10Gの構成は、基板搬送装置の一部の構成及び動作が異なる点を除き、上記第1実施形態と同じであるので、以下、相違点についてのみ説明し、上記第1実施形態と同じ構成及び機能を有する要素については、上記第1実施形態と同じ符号を付してその説明を省略する。 Second Embodiment
Next, an exposure apparatus according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 (a) to 25 (b). The configuration of the
図15(a)及び図15(b)はそれぞれ、第2実施形態に係る露光装置10Gの上面図及び側面図である。また、図16(a)及び図16(b)は、第2実施形態に係る基板搬入ハンド161Gの斜視図である。
FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B are respectively a top view and a side view of an exposure apparatus 10G according to the second embodiment. 16 (a) and 16 (b) are perspective views of a substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment.
(ステージ装置20G)
上記第1実施形態では、基板ホルダ28Aは、基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aの保持パッド184bを収納する切り欠き28bを備えていた(図3(a)及び図3(c)参照)。第2実施形態に係る基板ホルダ28Gは、図15(a)に示すように、切り欠き28bに加え、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gの保持パッド184aを収納する切り欠き28aを備える。 (Stage device 20G)
In the first embodiment, thesubstrate holder 28A is provided with the notch 28b that accommodates the holding pad 184b of the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A (see FIGS. 3A and 3C). As shown in FIG. 15A, the substrate holder 28G according to the second embodiment is provided with a notch 28a for receiving the holding pad 184a of the substrate carry-in bearer apparatus 182G in addition to the notch 28b.
上記第1実施形態では、基板ホルダ28Aは、基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aの保持パッド184bを収納する切り欠き28bを備えていた(図3(a)及び図3(c)参照)。第2実施形態に係る基板ホルダ28Gは、図15(a)に示すように、切り欠き28bに加え、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gの保持パッド184aを収納する切り欠き28aを備える。 (
In the first embodiment, the
(基板搬送装置100G)
第2実施形態に係る基板搬送装置100Gにおいて、ビームユニット152が備える複数のビーム153それぞれは、Z軸方向に延びる複数(例えば2本)の棒状の脚154によって、X軸方向の両端部よりも内側の位置で下方から支持されている。各ビーム153を支持する複数の脚154は、それぞれ下端部近傍がベース板156により連結されている。基板搬送装置100Gでは、ベース板156が不図示のXアクチュエータによりX軸方向へ所定のストロークで移動されることにより、ビームユニット152が一体的にX軸方向に所定のストロークで移動するようになっている。また、ベース板156がZアクチュエータ158によりZ軸方向へ移動されることにより、ビームユニット152が一体的にZ軸方向に上下動可能となっている。なお、図15(a)及び以降の上面図においては、ベース板156の図示を省略している。 (Substrate transfer apparatus 100G)
In thesubstrate transfer apparatus 100G according to the second embodiment, each of the plurality of beams 153 provided in the beam unit 152 has a plurality of (for example, two) bar-like legs 154 extending in the Z-axis direction, rather than both ends in the X-axis direction. It is supported from below at the inner position. A plurality of legs 154 supporting the respective beams 153 are connected by a base plate 156 near their lower end portions. In the substrate transfer apparatus 100G, the beam unit 152 is integrally moved in the X axis direction with a predetermined stroke by moving the base plate 156 in the X axis direction with a predetermined stroke by the X actuator (not shown). ing. Further, the base plate 156 is moved in the Z-axis direction by the Z actuator 158, so that the beam unit 152 can be integrally moved up and down in the Z-axis direction. The base plate 156 is not shown in FIG. 15A and the following top views.
第2実施形態に係る基板搬送装置100Gにおいて、ビームユニット152が備える複数のビーム153それぞれは、Z軸方向に延びる複数(例えば2本)の棒状の脚154によって、X軸方向の両端部よりも内側の位置で下方から支持されている。各ビーム153を支持する複数の脚154は、それぞれ下端部近傍がベース板156により連結されている。基板搬送装置100Gでは、ベース板156が不図示のXアクチュエータによりX軸方向へ所定のストロークで移動されることにより、ビームユニット152が一体的にX軸方向に所定のストロークで移動するようになっている。また、ベース板156がZアクチュエータ158によりZ軸方向へ移動されることにより、ビームユニット152が一体的にZ軸方向に上下動可能となっている。なお、図15(a)及び以降の上面図においては、ベース板156の図示を省略している。 (
In the
第2実施形態に係る基板搬送部160Gにおいて、図15(a)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Gは、複数(本実施形態では、例えば8本)の指部162Gを有している。複数の指部162Gは、-X側の端部近傍が連結部材163Gにより互いに連結されている。連結部材163Gは、基板搬入ハンド161Gに保持された基板Pの裏面へ気体を供給(給気)することによって基板Pを浮上支持させることができる構成になっている。これに対し、複数の指部162Gの+X側の端部は、自由端となっており、隣接する指部162G間は、ポート部150G側に開いている。また、各指部162Gは、図15(a)に示すように、平面視においてビームユニット152が有する複数のビームとY軸方向における位置が重ならないような配置になっている。
In the substrate transfer unit 160G according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15A, the substrate loading hand 161G has a plurality of (for example, eight in this embodiment) finger portions 162G. The plurality of finger portions 162G are connected to each other near the end on the -X side by a connecting member 163G. The connecting member 163G is configured to be capable of floatingly supporting the substrate P by supplying (supplying) a gas to the back surface of the substrate P held by the substrate loading hand 161G. On the other hand, the ends on the + X side of the plurality of finger portions 162G are free ends, and the adjacent finger portions 162G are open to the port portion 150G side. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the finger portions 162G are arranged such that the positions in the Y-axis direction do not overlap with the plurality of beams of the beam unit 152 in a plan view.
図16(a)及び図16(b)に示すように、複数の指部162Gのうち、Y軸方向の両端の指部162G1は、側面視において-X側(基板ホルダ28G側)の厚みが薄く、+X側(ポート部150G側)が厚くなる三角形状を有する。一方、内側の指部162G2は、ポート部側の厚みが、両端の指部162G1よりも薄くなっている。
As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), of the plurality of finger portions 162G, the finger portions 162G1 at both ends in the Y-axis direction have a thickness on the -X side (substrate holder 28G side) in side view It is thin and has a triangular shape in which the + X side (port portion 150G side) is thick. On the other hand, the thickness of the inner finger portion 162G2 on the port portion side is thinner than that of the finger portions 162G1 on both ends.
また、図16(a)及び図16(b)両端の指部162G1には、基板搬入ハンド161Gのアーム168が取り付けられている。図15(a)に示すように、アーム168の両端部は、X軸駆動装置164に連結されている。
Further, arms 168 of the substrate loading hand 161G are attached to the finger portions 162G1 at both ends of FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). As shown in FIG. 15A, both ends of the arm 168 are connected to the X-axis drive device 164.
基板搬入ハンド161Gは、図15(a)及び図15(b)に示すように、Y軸方向の両端の指部162G1に設けられた一対の基板ピックハンド167Gを有している。基板ピックハンド167Gは不図示の駆動装置によって、X軸方向及びZ軸方向に所定のストロークで移動可能となっている。
As shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b), the substrate loading hand 161G has a pair of substrate pick hands 167G provided on the finger portions 162G1 at both ends in the Y-axis direction. The substrate pick hand 167G can be moved in a predetermined stroke in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction by a drive device (not shown).
また、基板ピックハンド167Gは、不図示のバキューム装置から供給される真空吸引力により、基板Pの下面を吸着保持することができるようになっている。
Further, the substrate pick hand 167G can suction and hold the lower surface of the substrate P by the vacuum suction force supplied from a vacuum device (not shown).
(搬送装置180G)
基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gは、Xアクチュエータ186xを省略している点が、第1実施形態の基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと異なる。図15(b)に示すように、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gの保持パッド184aは、Zアクチュエータ186zにより切り欠き28a内で移動されることにより、基板Pの下面に接触する位置と、基板Pの下面から離間する位置との間で移動可能となっている。また、保持パッド184aは、Zアクチュエータ186zによって、切り欠き28a内に一部が収容された位置と、基板ホルダ28Gの上面よりも高い位置との間で移動が可能になっている。 (Conveyingdevice 180G)
The substrateloading bearer device 182G is different from the substrate loading bearer device 182A of the first embodiment in that the X actuator 186x is omitted. As shown in FIG. 15B, the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182G is moved within the notch 28a by the Z actuator 186z to contact the lower surface of the substrate P, and the lower surface of the substrate P. It is movable between a position away from In addition, the holding pad 184a can be moved by the Z actuator 186z between a position where a part is accommodated in the notch 28a and a position higher than the upper surface of the substrate holder 28G.
基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gは、Xアクチュエータ186xを省略している点が、第1実施形態の基板搬入ベアラ装置182Aと異なる。図15(b)に示すように、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gの保持パッド184aは、Zアクチュエータ186zにより切り欠き28a内で移動されることにより、基板Pの下面に接触する位置と、基板Pの下面から離間する位置との間で移動可能となっている。また、保持パッド184aは、Zアクチュエータ186zによって、切り欠き28a内に一部が収容された位置と、基板ホルダ28Gの上面よりも高い位置との間で移動が可能になっている。 (Conveying
The substrate
(基板交換動作)
以下、第2実施形態に係る露光装置10Gにおける、基板ホルダ28G上の基板Pの交換動作について、図17(a)~図24(b)を用いて説明する。 (Substrate exchange operation)
Hereinafter, the exchange operation of the substrate P on thesubstrate holder 28G in the exposure apparatus 10G according to the second embodiment will be described using FIGS. 17 (a) to 24 (b).
以下、第2実施形態に係る露光装置10Gにおける、基板ホルダ28G上の基板Pの交換動作について、図17(a)~図24(b)を用いて説明する。 (Substrate exchange operation)
Hereinafter, the exchange operation of the substrate P on the
図17(a)及び図17(b)に示すように、ステージ装置20Gが露光処理を行っている間、外部搬送装置300が-Z方向に移動されてビームユニット152に基板P2を載置する。その後、外部搬送装置300は、+X方向に移動され露光装置内から退出する。
As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, while the stage device 20G is performing exposure processing, the external transfer device 300 is moved in the -Z direction to place the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152. . Thereafter, the external transfer device 300 is moved in the + X direction and exits the exposure device.
基板搬入ハンド161Gは、+X方向に駆動され、ビームユニット152の下に-X側(基板ホルダ28G側)から進入する。
The substrate loading hand 161G is driven in the + X direction, and enters under the beam unit 152 from the -X side (substrate holder 28G side).
その後、図18(a)及び図18(b)に示すように、露光処理を終えたステージ装置20Gは、基板搬送部160Gとの基板受け渡し位置へと移動する。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the stage device 20G which has completed the exposure process moves to the substrate delivery position with the substrate transfer unit 160G.
ビームユニット152は、Zアクチュエータ158により、基板P2を保持したまま降下駆動(-Z方向に駆動)される。このとき、基板搬入ハンド161Gの基板ピックハンド167Gにビームユニット152上の基板P2の一部が接触する。基板ピックハンド167Gは、基板P2の下面を吸着把持する。
The beam unit 152 is driven downward (driven in the −Z direction) by the Z actuator 158 while holding the substrate P2. At this time, a part of the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 is in contact with the substrate pick hand 167G of the substrate loading hand 161G. The substrate pick hand 167G suctions and holds the lower surface of the substrate P2.
その後、図19(a)及び図19(b)に示すようにステージ装置20Gでは、基板ホルダ28G上の基板P1を、基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aによって+X方向にオフセットする。このとき、基板ホルダ28G及びオフセットビーム185aは、基板Pが浮上された状態で移動されるよう、基板P1の裏面に気体を供給(給気)する。
After that, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in the stage device 20G, the substrate P1 on the substrate holder 28G is offset in the + X direction by the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A. At this time, the substrate holder 28G and the offset beam 185a supply (charge) a gas to the back surface of the substrate P1 so that the substrate P is moved in a floating state.
ビームユニット152の各ビーム153からは加圧気体が噴出される。また、ビームユニット152は、徐々に降下を続ける。
Pressurized gas is ejected from each beam 153 of the beam unit 152. Also, the beam unit 152 continues to descend gradually.
基板搬入ハンド161Gは、ビームユニット152上の基板P2を基板ピックハンド167Gで吸着把持したまま、-X方向に徐々に移動される。基板P2は、基板搬入ハンド161Gの-X方向の移動に伴い-X方向に移動する。
The substrate loading hand 161G is gradually moved in the −X direction while holding the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 by suction with the substrate pick hand 167G. The substrate P2 moves in the -X direction along with the movement of the substrate loading hand 161G in the -X direction.
その後、図20(a)及び図20(b)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Gは、指部162Gの股部とビームユニット152とが平面視において重ならないX位置まで-X方向に移動される。
After that, as shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the substrate loading hand 161G is moved in the -X direction to the X position where the crotch of the finger 162G and the beam unit 152 do not overlap in plan view. Ru.
ビームユニット152は、基板搬入ハンド161Gの下方まで降下移動され、新しい基板P2を完全に基板搬入ハンド161Gに受け渡す。このとき、基板搬入ハンド161G上において、一対の基板ピックハンド167Gによって基板搬入ハンド161Gに対する基板P2の相対位置の調整を行ってもよい。
The beam unit 152 is moved down to the lower side of the substrate loading hand 161G, and completely transfers the new substrate P2 to the substrate loading hand 161G. At this time, on the substrate loading hand 161G, the relative position of the substrate P2 to the substrate loading hand 161G may be adjusted by the pair of substrate pick hands 167G.
その後、図21(a)及び図21(b)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Gは、基板P2を保持したまま-X方向に移動され、基板ホルダ28Gの上空における所定位置に配置させる。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the substrate loading hand 161G is moved in the −X direction while holding the substrate P2, and arranged at a predetermined position above the substrate holder 28G.
ステージ装置20Gでは、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gの保持パッド184aがZアクチュエータ186zにより上昇駆動される。基板搬入ハンド161Gは基板ピックハンド167Gにより、基板P2を斜め下に押し出す。これにより、基板P2の-X側の端部が保持パッド184aに接触する。これにより、保持パッド184aは、基板ホルダ28Gの上方で待機している基板搬入ハンド161G上の基板P2に下方から接触し、該基板P2の-X側の端部近傍を吸着保持する。なお、このタイミングで、基板ピックハンド167Gは、基板ホルダ28Gに対する基板P2の位置調整を行ってもよい。
In the stage device 20G, the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182G is driven to rise by the Z actuator 186z. The substrate loading hand 161G pushes the substrate P2 obliquely downward by the substrate pick hand 167G. Thereby, the end on the −X side of the substrate P2 contacts the holding pad 184a. As a result, the holding pad 184a contacts the substrate P2 on the substrate loading hand 161G waiting from above the substrate holder 28G from below, and holds the vicinity of the end portion on the −X side of the substrate P2 by suction. At this timing, the substrate pick hand 167G may adjust the position of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28G.
また、保持パッド184aによる基板P2の吸着保持動作と並行して、基板搬出ハンド170Aが移動され、基板P1のうち、基板ホルダ28Gから+X側にオフセットされた部分の下面を吸着把持する。
Further, in parallel with the suction holding operation of the substrate P2 by the holding pad 184a, the substrate carry-out hand 170A is moved, and the lower surface of the portion of the substrate P1 offset to the + X side from the substrate holder 28G is held by suction.
ビームユニット152は、-X方向及び-Z方向に移動され、基板ホルダ28Gとの基板受け渡し位置で停止する。またビームユニット152の各ビーム153から、加圧気体を噴出させる。これにより、ビームユニット152は、基板ホルダ28Gから搬出される基板P1を支持するガイドとなる。
The beam unit 152 is moved in the −X direction and the −Z direction, and stops at the substrate delivery position with the substrate holder 28G. Further, pressurized gas is ejected from each beam 153 of the beam unit 152. Thus, the beam unit 152 serves as a guide for supporting the substrate P1 carried out of the substrate holder 28G.
その後、基板搬入ハンド161Gの基板ピックハンド167Gによる基板P2の把持を解放し、図22(a)及び図22(b)に示すように、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gの保持パッド184aが、基板P2の-X側端部を吸着把持した状態で、基板搬送部160Gが搬出方向(+X側)に駆動される。基板搬送部160Gが搬出方向(+X側)に駆動されると、基板P1を保持した基板搬出ハンド170Aも+X方向へ駆動される。
Thereafter, the gripping of the substrate P2 by the substrate pick hand 167G of the substrate loading hand 161G is released, and as shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the holding pad 184a of the substrate loading bearer device 182G is the substrate P2. The substrate transfer unit 160G is driven in the unloading direction (+ X side) in a state where the −X side end portion is suctioned and held. When the substrate transport unit 160G is driven in the unloading direction (+ X side), the substrate unloading hand 170A holding the substrate P1 is also driven in the + X direction.
これにより、基板P1が基板ホルダ28G上から、ポート部150G(ビームユニット152)上へ移動する。このとき、ビームユニット152の上面からは加圧気体が噴出されているので、基板P1が基板ホルダ28G、及びポート部150G上を、非接触状態(基板搬出ハンド170Aにより保持されている部分を除く)で浮上搬送される。
As a result, the substrate P1 moves from above the substrate holder 28G to the port 150G (beam unit 152). At this time, since pressurized gas is ejected from the upper surface of the beam unit 152, the substrate P1 is not in contact with the substrate holder 28G and the port 150G (except for the portion held by the substrate carry-out hand 170A). ) And is transported.
その後、図23(a)及び図23(b)に示すように、基板搬出ハンド170Aは基板P1の把持を解放して、基板搬入ハンド161Gと共に-X方向へ移動される。ポート部150Gは、ビームユニット152上に基板P2を保持したまま+X方向へ移動される。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, the substrate unloading hand 170A releases the grip of the substrate P1 and is moved in the −X direction together with the substrate loading hand 161G. The port 150G is moved in the + X direction while holding the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152.
ステージ装置20Gでは、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Gが基板ホルダ28Gに対する基板P2の位置調整を行った後、Zアクチュエータ186zにより-Z方向に移動され、その一部が切り欠き28a内に収容される。これにより、基板P2が基板ホルダ28Gのホルダ基板保持面に吸着する。なお、ここで述べた基板P2の位置調整(アライメント)は、省略することができ、必要に応じて実施するように制御してもよい。
In the stage device 20G, after the substrate loading bearer device 182G adjusts the position of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28G, the substrate loading bearer device 182G is moved in the −Z direction by the Z actuator 186z, and a part thereof is accommodated in the notch 28a. Thus, the substrate P2 is adsorbed to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28G. In addition, position adjustment (alignment) of the board | substrate P2 described here can be abbreviate | omitted, and you may control to implement as needed.
その後、図24(a)及び図24(b)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Gが基板P1に干渉しない位置まで移動すると、ビームユニット152は+Z方向に移動され、外部搬送装置300との基板受け渡し位置まで移動する。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, when the substrate loading hand 161G moves to a position where it does not interfere with the substrate P1, the beam unit 152 is moved in the + Z direction, and the substrate with the external transfer device 300 is moved. Move to the delivery position.
外部搬送装置300はビームユニット152上の基板P1を回収した後、新たな基板P3をポート部150Aに搬送する。
After recovering the substrate P1 on the beam unit 152, the external transfer device 300 transfers a new substrate P3 to the port 150A.
以上、詳細に説明したように、第2実施形態によれば、基板搬入ハンド161Gの、隣接する指部162G間は、ポート部150G側が開いている。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Gは、基板ホルダ28G側から直接ビームユニット152の下方に入り込み、ビームユニット152の上方へと駆動されることにより、ビームユニット152上の基板P2を掬い取って、基板ホルダ28G側に移動することができる。そのため、ビームユニット152上に基板P2が載置されている状態でも、基板搬入ハンド161Gは、X軸方向において短い移動距離で基板P2の下方に入り込むことができる。つまり、基板搬入ハンド161Gは、ポート部150Gの+X側の位置まで移動しなくとも、ビームユニット152上の基板P2を受け取ることができる。また、基板搬入ハンド161Gは、露光済み基板P1を、ポート部150Gの+X側の位置まで移動しなくとも、ビームユニット152上へ受け渡すことができる。つまり、外部搬送装置300とポート部150Gと基板搬入ハンド161Gと基板ホルダ28GとのX方向に関する位置関係を変えずに、基板P2の搬入および基板P1の搬出の一連の動作を行うことができる。さらに、基板搬入ハンド161Gがポート部150Gの+X側の位置まで移動する空間を設けるようにチャンバを設置する必要がないため、露光装置のフットプリント、つまり露光装置10Gの設置面積を小さくすることができる。また、露光装置内で不具合が発生した場合や、初期設定等の作業を行う場合等において、外部搬送装置300がなくても、ポート部150G(ビームユニット152)まで搬出した基板Pを再度基板搬入ハンド161Gに受け渡して、基板ホルダ28Gに搬入することができる。
As described above in detail, according to the second embodiment, the port portion 150G side is open between the adjacent finger portions 162G of the substrate loading hand 161G. Thereby, the substrate loading hand 161G directly enters the lower side of the beam unit 152 from the substrate holder 28G side and is driven to the upper side of the beam unit 152 to scoop the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152, thereby the substrate holder It can move to the 28G side. Therefore, even in a state where the substrate P2 is mounted on the beam unit 152, the substrate loading hand 161G can enter below the substrate P2 with a short moving distance in the X-axis direction. That is, the substrate loading hand 161G can receive the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 without moving to the position on the + X side of the port 150G. Further, the substrate loading hand 161G can deliver the exposed substrate P1 onto the beam unit 152 without having to move to the position on the + X side of the port portion 150G. That is, a series of operations of loading the substrate P2 and unloading the substrate P1 can be performed without changing the positional relationship in the X direction between the external transfer device 300, the port 150G, the substrate loading hand 161G, and the substrate holder 28G. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to install a chamber so as to provide a space in which the substrate loading hand 161G moves to a position on the + X side of the port 150G, the footprint of the exposure apparatus, that is, the installation area of the exposure apparatus 10G can be reduced. it can. In addition, in the case where a problem occurs in the exposure apparatus or when performing work such as initialization, the substrate P carried out to the port 150G (beam unit 152) is carried in again without the external transfer device 300. It can be delivered to the hand 161G and carried into the substrate holder 28G.
また、本第2実施形態によれば、基板搬入ハンド161Gの複数の指部162Gは、-X側(基板ホルダ28G側)の端部近傍が連結部材163Gにより互いに連結されている。これにより、第2実施形態に係る基板搬入ハンド161Gは、基板搬入ハンド161Aと比較して基板P2を基板ホルダ28G上に歪みなく設置することができる。
Further, according to the second embodiment, the plurality of finger portions 162G of the substrate loading hand 161G are mutually connected by the connecting member 163G in the vicinity of the end portion on the −X side (the substrate holder 28G side). Thus, the substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment can install the substrate P2 on the substrate holder 28G without distortion as compared with the substrate loading hand 161A.
具体的には、図25(a)に示すように、第1実施形態に係る基板搬入ハンド161Aにおいては、-X側において指部162Aの間が開いている。そのため、基板ホルダ28Aに設置する直前の基板P2の-X側の縁は、図25(a)に示すように指部162Aにより支持されている領域と支持されていない領域とがあるため微小量ではあるが波打っており、基板P2を基板ホルダ28Aに歪みなく設置するのが難しい場合がある。一方、図16(a)及び図16(b)に示すように、第2実施形態に係る基板搬入ハンド161Gは、-X側において隣接する指部162Gの間が開いておらず連続しており、基板P2の-X側の端を面で支持することができる。これにより、図25(b)に示すように、基板ホルダ28Gに設置する直前の基板P2の-X側の縁は、波打ちづらくなる。そのため、第2実施形態に係る基板搬入ハンド161Gは、基板搬入ハンド161Aと比較して基板P2を基板ホルダ28G上に歪みなく設置することができる。
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25A, in the substrate loading hand 161A according to the first embodiment, the space between the finger portions 162A is open on the −X side. Therefore, the edge on the -X side of the substrate P2 immediately before being installed on the substrate holder 28A is a minute amount because there is a region supported by the finger portion 162A and a region not supported as shown in FIG. However, there are cases where it is difficult to place the substrate P2 on the substrate holder 28A without distortion. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment does not open between the adjacent finger portions 162G on the -X side and is continuous. The end on the -X side of the substrate P2 can be supported by a plane. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the edge on the −X side of the substrate P2 immediately before being installed on the substrate holder 28G becomes difficult to wave. Therefore, the substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment can set the substrate P2 on the substrate holder 28G without distortion as compared with the substrate loading hand 161A.
また、本第2実施形態によれば、基板搬送部160G(基板搬入ハンド161G)とステージ装置20G(基板ホルダ28G)とを逆方向に移動することによって、基板搬入ハンド161Gを基板P2と基板ホルダ28Gとの間から退避させる。これにより、基板P2の基板ホルダ28Gへの搬入時間を短縮することができる。
Further, according to the second embodiment, the substrate loading hand 161G is moved to the substrate P2 and the substrate holder by moving the substrate transfer unit 160G (substrate loading hand 161G) and the stage device 20G (substrate holder 28G) in opposite directions. Evacuate from 28G. Thereby, the carrying-in time to the board | substrate holder 28G of the board | substrate P2 can be shortened.
また、本第2実施形態によれば、基板搬入ハンド161Gの指部162Gにおいて、両端の指部162G1以外の内側の指部162G2は、ポート部側の厚みが、両端の指部162G1よりも薄くなっている(例えば、図16(b)参照)。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Gの重量を軽くすることができる。
Further, according to the second embodiment, in the finger portions 162G of the substrate loading hand 161G, the thickness of the port portion side of the inner finger portions 162G2 other than the finger portions 162G1 at both ends is thinner than the finger portions 162G1 at both ends (See, for example, FIG. 16 (b)). Thereby, the weight of the substrate loading hand 161G can be reduced.
また、本第2実施形態によれば、基板搬入ハンド161Gのアーム168は、両端の指部162G1に取り付けられているので、基板搬入ハンド161Gは基板P2の中央部を支持することができ、基板搬入ハンド161Gを小さくすることができる。さらに、基板搬入ハンド161Gのアーム168は、両端の指部162G1に取り付けられているので、基板搬入ハンド161G全体の重心を支持するため、基板搬入ハンド161Gが撓むのを抑制できる。
Further, according to the second embodiment, since the arms 168 of the substrate loading hand 161G are attached to the fingers 162G1 at both ends, the substrate loading hand 161G can support the central portion of the substrate P2, and the substrate The carry-in hand 161G can be made smaller. Furthermore, since the arms 168 of the substrate loading hand 161G are attached to the finger portions 162G1 at both ends, since the center of gravity of the entire substrate loading hand 161G is supported, bending of the substrate loading hand 161G can be suppressed.
(第1変形例)
上記第2実施形態では、外部搬送装置300とポート部150Gのビームユニット152との間で基板を受け渡すZ位置(パスライン)は、基板ホルダ28Gの上面よりも高い位置に設定されていたが、当該パスラインの高さは自由に設定できる(制限がない)。 (First modification)
In the second embodiment, the Z position (pass line) for delivering the substrate between theexternal transfer device 300 and the beam unit 152 of the port 150G is set to a position higher than the upper surface of the substrate holder 28G. , The height of the pass line can be freely set (no restriction).
上記第2実施形態では、外部搬送装置300とポート部150Gのビームユニット152との間で基板を受け渡すZ位置(パスライン)は、基板ホルダ28Gの上面よりも高い位置に設定されていたが、当該パスラインの高さは自由に設定できる(制限がない)。 (First modification)
In the second embodiment, the Z position (pass line) for delivering the substrate between the
図26(a)及び図26(b)は、第1変形例における基板交換動作について説明するための図である。
FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are diagrams for explaining the substrate exchange operation in the first modified example.
図26(a)及び図26(b)に示すように、外部搬送装置300は、基板ホルダ28Gの上面TSよりも低い位置で停止したビームユニット152上に基板P2を載置する。
As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the external transfer device 300 places the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 stopped at a position lower than the upper surface TS of the substrate holder 28G.
その後、上記第2実施形態の図17(a)及び図17(b)に示すように、ビームユニット152が基板搬入ハンド161Gの最高部よりも高い位置まで上昇すれば、基板搬入ハンド161Gを上下に移動する駆動装置がない場合でも、基板P2を基板搬入ハンド161Gに受け渡すことができる。これにより、例えば、露光装置内で不具合が発生した場合や、初期設定等の作業を行う場合等において、外部搬送装置300がなくても、ポート部150G(ビームユニット152)まで搬出した基板を再度基板搬入ハンド161Gに受け渡して、基板ホルダ28Gに搬入することができる。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B of the second embodiment, if the beam unit 152 is elevated to a position higher than the highest portion of the substrate loading hand 161G, the substrate loading hand 161G is vertically moved. The substrate P2 can be delivered to the substrate loading hand 161G even when there is no drive device to move to the position. Thus, for example, when a problem occurs in the exposure apparatus, or when performing work such as initial setting, etc., the substrate carried out to the port 150G (beam unit 152) is again read even without the external transfer device 300. It can be delivered to the substrate loading hand 161G and loaded into the substrate holder 28G.
(第2変形例)
第2変形例は、基板搬送装置の構成を変えた例である。 (2nd modification)
The second modification is an example in which the configuration of the substrate transfer apparatus is changed.
第2変形例は、基板搬送装置の構成を変えた例である。 (2nd modification)
The second modification is an example in which the configuration of the substrate transfer apparatus is changed.
第2変形例に係る基板搬送装置100Iにおいて、基板搬送部160Iは、基板搬入ハンド161IをY軸周りに回転移動させる駆動系を備えている。すなわち、基板搬入ハンド161Iは、駆動系により基板保持面をY軸周りに傾けることが可能となっている。
In the substrate transfer apparatus 100I according to the second modification, the substrate transfer unit 160I includes a drive system that rotationally moves the substrate loading hand 161I around the Y axis. That is, the substrate loading hand 161I can tilt the substrate holding surface around the Y axis by the drive system.
また、第2変形例では、図27(a)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Iが備える基板ピックハンド167Iのストロークが、第2実施形態の基板ピックハンド167Gよりも長くなっている。なお、第2変形例では、図27(a)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Iの-X側端部から指部162Iの付け根までの距離、すなわち、連結部材163IのX軸方向における幅が、第2実施形態の連結部材163Gよりも長くなっている。
Further, in the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 27A, the stroke of the substrate pick hand 167I provided in the substrate loading hand 161I is longer than the substrate pick hand 167G of the second embodiment. In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 27A, the distance from the −X side end of the substrate loading hand 161I to the base of the finger portion 162I, that is, the width of the connecting member 163I in the X axis direction is , And is longer than the connecting member 163G of the second embodiment.
第2変形例に係る基板搬送装置100Iを用いた基板交換動作について、図27(a)~図30(b)を用いて説明する。なお、図27(a)及び図27(b)の状態は、第2実施形態における図17(a)及び図17(b)の状態にそれぞれ対応する。
The substrate exchange operation using the substrate transfer apparatus 100I according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 (a) to 30 (b). The states of FIGS. 27A and 27B correspond to the states of FIGS. 17A and 17B in the second embodiment, respectively.
図27(a)及び図27(b)に示すように、ステージ装置20Gが露光処理を行っている間、外部搬送装置300は-Z方向に移動されてビームユニット152上に新しい基板P2を載置し、その後、+X方向に移動され露光装置10I内から退出する。
As shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B, while the stage device 20G is performing exposure processing, the external transfer device 300 is moved in the -Z direction to place a new substrate P2 on the beam unit 152. Then, it is moved in the + X direction and exits the exposure apparatus 10I.
基板搬入ハンド161Iは、+X方向に移動され、ビームユニット152の下に-X側(基板ホルダ28G側)から進入する。そして、基板搬入ハンド161Iの指部162Iの股部がビームユニット152の-X側端部と平面視において重複しない位置で停止される。
The substrate loading hand 161I is moved in the + X direction, and enters under the beam unit 152 from the −X side (substrate holder 28G side). Then, the crotch portion of the finger portion 162I of the substrate loading hand 161I is stopped at a position not overlapping with the −X side end portion of the beam unit 152 in plan view.
その後、図28(a)及び図28(b)に示すように、露光処理を終えたステージ装置20Gは、ポート部150Gとの基板受け渡し位置へと移動する。
After that, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the stage device 20G that has finished the exposure process moves to the substrate delivery position with the port 150G.
基板搬入ハンド161Iは、基板搬入ハンド161Iの基板保持面がビームユニット152上の基板P2と略平行となるように、Y軸周りに回転駆動される。ビームユニット152は、基板P2を保持したまま降下移動(-Z方向に移動)され、基板搬入ハンド161Iの基板ピックハンド167Iにビームユニット152上の基板P2の一部が接触する位置で停止する。基板ピックハンド167Iは、基板P2の裏面を吸着把持する。
The substrate loading hand 161I is rotationally driven around the Y axis such that the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161I is substantially parallel to the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152. The beam unit 152 is moved downward (moved in the −Z direction) while holding the substrate P2, and stops at a position where a part of the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152 contacts the substrate pick hand 167I of the substrate loading hand 161I. The substrate pick hand 167I sucks and holds the back surface of the substrate P2.
その後、図29(a)及び図29(b)に示すように、ステージ装置20Gでは、基板ホルダ28G上の基板P1を、基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aによって+X方向にオフセットする。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, in the stage device 20G, the substrate P1 on the substrate holder 28G is offset in the + X direction by the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A.
基板搬入ハンド161Iの基板ピックハンド167Iは、ビームユニット152上の基板P2を把持したまま-X方向に移動される。これにより、基板P2は、基板搬入ハンド161Iとビームユニット152とに保持された状態で、基板搬入ハンド161I上へ移動される。このとき、ビームユニット152上、及び、基板搬出ハンド161I上から加圧気体が噴出される。基板ピックハンド167Iが、基板P2を吸着保持しているため、基板P2が、ビームユニット152上や基板搬出ハンド161I上から、落下する恐れがない。基板P2は、基板搬入ハンド161Iとビームユニット152とに保持されているため、基板搬入ハンド161Iがビームユニット152に対して+Z方向へ移動してビームユニット152から基板P2が基板搬入ハンド161Iに載置されるよりも、基板P2への負荷が少ない。よって、基板搬入ハンド161Iとビームユニット152間の基板P2の受け渡し時に、基板P2が破損する恐れを少なくすることができる。
The substrate pick hand 167I of the substrate loading hand 161I is moved in the −X direction while holding the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152. Thus, the substrate P2 is moved onto the substrate loading hand 161I while being held by the substrate loading hand 161I and the beam unit 152. At this time, pressurized gas is ejected from the beam unit 152 and the substrate carry-out hand 161I. Since the substrate pick hand 167I holds the substrate P2 by suction, the substrate P2 does not fall from the beam unit 152 or the substrate carry-out hand 161I. Since the substrate P2 is held by the substrate loading hand 161I and the beam unit 152, the substrate loading hand 161I moves in the + Z direction with respect to the beam unit 152 to load the substrate P2 from the beam unit 152 onto the substrate loading hand 161I. There is less load on the substrate P2 than placement. Therefore, the risk of breakage of the substrate P2 can be reduced when the substrate P2 is transferred between the substrate loading hand 161I and the beam unit 152.
その後、図30(a)及び図30(b)に示すように、ビームユニット152は基板搬入ハンド161Iの下方まで降下駆動され、基板P2を完全に基板搬入ハンド161Iに受け渡す。基板P2が基板搬入ハンド161Iに載置されると、基板搬入ハンド161IはY軸周りに回転駆動され、基板搬入ハンド161Iの基板保持面が、基板ホルダ28Gのホルダ基板保持面よりに対して傾斜された状態(図27(b)の状態)となる。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the beam unit 152 is driven down to the lower side of the substrate loading hand 161I, and delivers the substrate P2 completely to the substrate loading hand 161I. When the substrate P2 is placed on the substrate loading hand 161I, the substrate loading hand 161I is rotationally driven around the Y axis, and the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161I is inclined relative to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28G. It will be in the state of FIG. 27 (b).
以後の動作は、第2実施形態と同様であるため説明を省略する。
The subsequent operation is the same as that of the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
第2変形例によれば、基板搬入ハンド161Iの基板保持面がビームユニット152上の基板P2と略平行となるように、基板搬入ハンド161IをY軸周りに回転駆動した後、ビームユニット152条の基板P2を基板搬入ハンド161Iに受け渡す。これにより、基板P2を撓ませることなく確実に基板搬入ハンド161Iに受け渡すことができる。
According to the second modification, after the substrate loading hand 161I is rotationally driven around the Y axis so that the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161I is substantially parallel to the substrate P2 on the beam unit 152, the beam unit 152 is formed. Substrate P2 is transferred to the substrate loading hand 161I. Thus, the substrate P2 can be reliably delivered to the substrate loading hand 161I without bending.
また、第2変形例によれば、連結部材163IのX軸方向の幅が広い。これにより、基板搬入ハンド161Iの指部162Iの長さを短くし、基板搬入ハンド161I全体の剛性を上げることができる。
Further, according to the second modification, the width of the connecting member 163I in the X-axis direction is wide. Thus, the length of the finger portion 162I of the substrate loading hand 161I can be shortened, and the rigidity of the entire substrate loading hand 161I can be increased.
(第3変形例)
第2変形例では、ビームユニット152から基板搬入ハンド161Iへの基板P2への移動を、基板搬入ハンド161Iを傾けることによって行なったが、第3変形例では、ビームユニット152を傾けることによって行う。 (Third modification)
In the second modification, the movement from thebeam unit 152 to the substrate loading hand 161I is performed by tilting the substrate loading hand 161I. However, in the third modification, the beam unit 152 is tilted.
第2変形例では、ビームユニット152から基板搬入ハンド161Iへの基板P2への移動を、基板搬入ハンド161Iを傾けることによって行なったが、第3変形例では、ビームユニット152を傾けることによって行う。 (Third modification)
In the second modification, the movement from the
図31(a)に示すように、第3変形例に係る基板搬送装置100Jにおいて、ポート部150Jは、上端がビームユニット152のビーム153に接続された脚154a及び154bを備える。また、ポート部150Jは、脚154a及び脚154bを独立してZ軸方向に伸縮可能なZアクチュエータ158a及び158bを備えている。当該Zアクチュエータ158a及び158bが、脚154a及び154bの伸縮量を変更することにより、ビームユニット152の上面の傾きを変更することができる。なお、図31(a)においては、両端の指部162I1と内側の指部162I2との間に配置されているビームユニット152を図示している。
As shown in FIG. 31A, in the substrate transfer apparatus 100J according to the third modification, the port 150J includes legs 154a and 154b whose upper ends are connected to the beam 153 of the beam unit 152. In addition, the port portion 150J includes Z actuators 158a and 158b which can extend and contract in the Z-axis direction independently of the legs 154a and 154b. The Z actuators 158a and 158b can change the tilt of the upper surface of the beam unit 152 by changing the amount of expansion and contraction of the legs 154a and 154b. In FIG. 31A, the beam unit 152 disposed between the finger portions 162I1 at both ends and the inner finger portion 162I2 is illustrated.
次に、ビームユニット152から基板搬入ハンド161Iへの基板P2の受け渡しについて説明する。
Next, delivery of the substrate P2 from the beam unit 152 to the substrate loading hand 161I will be described.
図31(a)は、外部搬送装置300によって、基板P2がビームユニット152上に設置された状態を示している。このとき、基板搬入ハンド161Iは、ビームユニット152の-X側から+X方向に移動され、平面視において指部162Gの股部がビームユニット152の-X側端部と平面視で重ならない位置で停止される。
FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the substrate P2 is installed on the beam unit 152 by the external transfer device 300. FIG. At this time, the substrate loading hand 161I is moved in the + X direction from the -X side of the beam unit 152, and the crotch of the finger portion 162G does not overlap with the -X side end of the beam unit 152 in plan view. It is stopped.
次に、図31(b)に示すように、Zアクチュエータ158a及び158bにより、脚154a及び154bの伸縮量を変えて、ビームユニット152の上面が基板搬入ハンド161Iの基板保持面と略同一面を形成するよう、ビームユニット152を傾斜させる。
Next, as shown in FIG. 31B, the extension amounts of the legs 154a and 154b are changed by the Z actuators 158a and 158b, and the upper surface of the beam unit 152 is substantially the same as the substrate holding surface of the substrate loading hand 161I. The beam unit 152 is tilted to form.
次に、ビームユニット152によって保持されていた基板P2は、ビームユニット152の降下と共に基板ピックハンド167Iによって把持され、基板ピックハンド167Iの移動によって基板位置をずらしながら基板搬入ハンド161Iに受け渡される。
Next, the substrate P2 held by the beam unit 152 is gripped by the substrate pick hand 167I with the lowering of the beam unit 152, and delivered to the substrate loading hand 161I while shifting the substrate position by the movement of the substrate pick hand 167I.
第3変形例のように、ビームユニット152を傾けることによって、ビームユニット152から基板搬入ハンド161Iへ基板P2を移動させてもよい。
As in the third modification, the substrate P2 may be moved from the beam unit 152 to the substrate loading hand 161I by tilting the beam unit 152.
(第4変形例)
第4変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの指部の構成を変えた例である。 (4th modification)
The fourth modified example is an example in which the configuration of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand is changed.
第4変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの指部の構成を変えた例である。 (4th modification)
The fourth modified example is an example in which the configuration of the finger portion of the substrate loading hand is changed.
図32(a)及び図33(a)に示すように、第4変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Kは、X軸方向において、基板寸法とほぼ同じ長さの指部162Kを有する。また、図32(b)等に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Kの形状は、側面視において、両先端が尖ったひし形のような形をしており、中央部分の厚みのある場所にアーム168が取り付けられている。
As shown in FIGS. 32A and 33A, the substrate loading hand 161K according to the fourth modification has finger portions 162K of substantially the same length as the substrate dimension in the X-axis direction. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (b) etc., the shape of the substrate loading hand 161K is shaped like a rhombus with sharpened both ends in a side view, and the arm 168 is located at a thick central portion. Is attached.
第4変形例におけるビームユニット152から基板搬入ハンド161Kへの基板の受け渡しについて、図32(a)~図33(b)を用いて説明する。
The delivery of the substrate from the beam unit 152 to the substrate loading hand 161K in the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 (a) to 33 (b).
図32(a)及び図32(b)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Kは、指部162Kの股部がビームユニット152の-X側端部と平面視において重ならない位置に配置される。
As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the substrate loading hand 161K is disposed at a position where the crotch of the finger 162K does not overlap with the −X side end of the beam unit 152 in plan view.
その後、外部搬送装置300がビームユニット152上に基板P2を受け渡すと、図33(a)及び図33(b)に示すように、ビームユニット152は-Z方向へ移動される。基板搬入ハンド161Kの指部162Kの長さが基板P2の長さとほぼ同じであるため、ビームユニット152の-Z軸方向への移動により、基板P2は基板搬入ハンド161K上に載置される。その後、基板ピックハンド167Kによって、基板P2を斜面側にスライドさせる。これにより、基板P2の一部は、基板ホルダ28Gのホルダ基板保持面に対して傾斜した状態となる。以降の動作は、第2実施形態とほぼ同様である詳細な説明を省略する。
Thereafter, when the external transfer device 300 delivers the substrate P2 onto the beam unit 152, the beam unit 152 is moved in the -Z direction as shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b). Since the length of the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K is substantially the same as the length of the substrate P2, the substrate P2 is placed on the substrate loading hand 161K by the movement of the beam unit 152 in the −Z axial direction. Thereafter, the substrate P2 is slid to the slope side by the substrate pick hand 167K. As a result, a part of the substrate P2 is inclined with respect to the holder substrate holding surface of the substrate holder 28G. The subsequent operations will not be described in detail, being substantially the same as in the second embodiment.
第4変形例によれば、基板搬入ハンド161Kの指部162Kの長さ(X軸方向の長さ)が基板の長さとほぼ同じであるため、ビームユニット152上に載置された基板P2を基板搬入ハンド161Kで受取る場合に、基板搬入ハンド161Kをビームユニット152の下から上に通過させるだけで、基板P2を掬い取ることができる。そのため、動作が単純で、基板P2の損傷や発塵が起こり難いという効果がある。
According to the fourth modification, since the length (length in the X-axis direction) of the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K is substantially the same as the length of the substrate, the substrate P2 placed on the beam unit 152 is In the case of receiving by the substrate loading hand 161K, the substrate P2 can be scooped only by passing the substrate loading hand 161K from the bottom to the top of the beam unit 152. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation is simple and damage to the substrate P2 and dust generation hardly occur.
(第5変形例)
第5変形例は、外部搬送装置300から基板搬入ハンド161Kに直接基板を受け渡す例である。 (5th modification)
The fifth modified example is an example in which a substrate is directly delivered from theexternal transfer device 300 to the substrate loading hand 161K.
第5変形例は、外部搬送装置300から基板搬入ハンド161Kに直接基板を受け渡す例である。 (5th modification)
The fifth modified example is an example in which a substrate is directly delivered from the
第5変形例において、外部搬送装置300のフォークは、図34(a)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Kの指部162KとY軸方向における位置が平面視において重ならないように配置されている。また、ビームユニット152のビーム153は、外部搬送装置300のフォークと平面視において重ならないように配置されている。その結果、第5変形例において、基板搬入ハンド161Kの指部162Kとビームユニット152のビーム153とは、平面視において重なる位置に配置されている。
In the fifth modification, as shown in FIG. 34A, the forks of the external transfer device 300 are arranged such that the position in the Y-axis direction of the substrate loading hand 161K and the finger portion 162K do not overlap in plan view. . Further, the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 is disposed so as not to overlap with the fork of the external transfer device 300 in plan view. As a result, in the fifth modification, the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K and the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 are disposed at overlapping positions in plan view.
以下、第5変形例における外部搬送装置300から基板搬入ハンド161Kへの基板の受け渡しについて、図34(a)~図35(b)を用いて説明する。
Hereinafter, delivery of a substrate from the external transfer apparatus 300 to the substrate loading hand 161K in the fifth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 (a) to 35 (b).
図34(a)及び図34(b)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Kは、外部搬送装置300との基板受け渡し位置に配置されるよう+X方向に駆動される。外部搬送装置300は、基板P2を保持したまま、基板搬入ハンド161Kとの基板受け渡し位置に到達するまで、-X方向に移動される。
As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the substrate loading hand 161K is driven in the + X direction so as to be disposed at a substrate delivery position with the external transfer device 300. The external transfer device 300 is moved in the −X direction until reaching the substrate delivery position with the substrate loading hand 161K while holding the substrate P2.
その後、図35(a)及び図35(b)に示すように露光処理を終えたステージ装置20Gは、ビームユニット152との基板受け渡し位置へと移動する。また、ステージ装置20Gでは、基板ホルダ28G上の基板P1を、基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aによって+X方向にオフセットする。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B, the stage device 20G which has completed the exposure process moves to the substrate delivery position with the beam unit 152. In the stage device 20G, the substrate P1 on the substrate holder 28G is offset in the + X direction by the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A.
外部搬送装置300が-Z方向に移動されると、基板P2の下面が基板ピックハンド167Kに接触する。基板ピックハンド167Kは、基板P2の下面を吸着把持する。
When the external transfer device 300 is moved in the −Z direction, the lower surface of the substrate P2 contacts the substrate pick hand 167K. The substrate pick hand 167K sucks and holds the lower surface of the substrate P2.
基板P2の下面を吸着把持した基板ピックハンド167Kは、-X方向に駆動される。これにより、外部搬送装置300上の基板P2が基板搬入ハンド161Kへと移動する。外部搬送装置300は、そのまま下降駆動され基板搬入ハンド161K上に基板P2を完全に受け渡すと、+X方向に駆動され露光装置10L内から退出する。
The substrate pick hand 167K holding the lower surface of the substrate P2 by suction is driven in the −X direction. Thus, the substrate P2 on the external transfer device 300 is moved to the substrate loading hand 161K. When the external transfer device 300 is driven to descend as it is and completely transfers the substrate P2 onto the substrate loading hand 161K, the external transfer device 300 is driven in the + X direction to withdraw from the inside of the exposure device 10L.
ビームユニット152は、-Z方向及び-X方向に移動され、ステージ装置20Gとの基板受け渡し位置へと向かう。
The beam unit 152 is moved in the −Z direction and the −X direction, and travels to the substrate delivery position with the stage device 20G.
その後の動作は、第2実施形態とほぼ同様であるため、その詳細な説明を省略する。
The subsequent operation is almost the same as that of the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.
以上説明したように、第5変形例によれば、基板P2の搬入に際しては、基板搬入ハンド161Kがポート部150Gを介さず外部搬送装置300から基板P2を直接受け取ることができる。これにより、これまで外部搬送装置300からポート部150Gへの基板P2の受け渡し、ポート部150Gから基板搬入ハンド161Kへの基板P2の受け渡しという2回の受け渡し動作が必要であったのに対し、外部搬送装置300から基板搬入ハンド161Kへ受け渡しという1回の受け渡しだけで良く、基板P2の受け渡し回数が削減されるため、基板P2の搬入にかかる時間の短縮と基板P2の損傷や発塵を防ぐことができる。
As described above, according to the fifth modification, at the time of loading of the substrate P2, the substrate loading hand 161K can directly receive the substrate P2 from the external transfer device 300 without passing through the port portion 150G. Thus, while two transfer operations of transfer of the substrate P2 from the external transfer apparatus 300 to the port 150G and transfer of the substrate P2 from the port 150G to the substrate loading hand 161K have been necessary, this is the case Since only one delivery of the delivery from the transfer apparatus 300 to the substrate loading hand 161K is sufficient and the number of times of delivery of the substrate P2 is reduced, shortening of the time taken for loading the substrate P2 and prevention of damage and dusting of the substrate P2 Can.
なお、第5変形例において、基板P1の回収(搬出)については、第2実施形態と同様に、基板P1をビームユニット152から外部搬送装置300へと受け渡す。
In the fifth modification, the substrate P1 is transferred from the beam unit 152 to the external transfer apparatus 300 as in the second embodiment for the recovery (unloading) of the substrate P1.
なお、第5変形例では、ビームユニット152と外部搬送装置300のロボットハンドの指部が平面視において重ならないようにするために、ビームユニット152のビーム153と基板搬入ハンド161Kの指部162Kが平面視において重なるように配置したが、これに限られるものではない。ビームユニット152のビーム153と基板搬入ハンド161Kの指部162Kも平面視において重ならないようにしてもよい。この場合、ビームユニット152はY軸方向に1つの指部162K分シフトできるようになっていてもよい。これにより、基板ホルダ28Gからポート部150Gまで搬出された基板を再び基板搬入ハンドで掬い取ることができる。
In the fifth modification, the beam 153 of the beam unit 152 and the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K do not overlap so that the beam unit 152 and the finger portion of the robot hand of the external transfer device 300 do not overlap in plan view. Although it arrange | positions so that it may overlap in planar view, it is not restricted to this. The beam 153 of the beam unit 152 and the finger portion 162K of the substrate loading hand 161K may not overlap in plan view. In this case, the beam unit 152 may be shifted by one finger portion 162K in the Y-axis direction. Thereby, the substrate carried out from the substrate holder 28G to the port portion 150G can be again scooped by the substrate carrying hand.
基板を受け渡しする場合に、ビーム153が指部162Kと平面視において重ならないようにするために、ビームユニット152がY軸方向にシフトするのではなく、外部搬送装置300がY軸方向にシフトしてもよいし、基板搬入ハンド161KがY軸方向にシフトしてもよい。
When transferring the substrate, the external transfer device 300 is shifted in the Y-axis direction, not the beam unit 152 is shifted in the Y-axis direction so that the beam 153 does not overlap with the finger portion 162K in plan view. Alternatively, the substrate loading hand 161K may be shifted in the Y-axis direction.
(第6変形例)
第6変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの構成を変えたものである。 (Sixth modification)
The sixth modification is the one in which the configuration of the substrate loading hand is changed.
第6変形例は、基板搬入ハンドの構成を変えたものである。 (Sixth modification)
The sixth modification is the one in which the configuration of the substrate loading hand is changed.
図36は、第6変形例に係る基板搬入ハンド161Lを示す斜視図である。図36に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Lは、XZ断面が三角形状の板部263と、板部263を支持するアーム部265と、を有する。板部263の上面は、XY面に対して傾斜している。
FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing a substrate loading hand 161L according to the sixth modification. As shown in FIG. 36, the substrate loading hand 161L has a plate portion 263 having a triangular XZ cross section, and an arm portion 265 supporting the plate portion 263. The upper surface of the plate portion 263 is inclined with respect to the XY plane.
第6変形例に示すように、基板搬入ハンドは指部を有さなくてもよい。すなわち、基板搬入ハンドはフォーク形状を有さなくてもよい。
As shown in the sixth modified example, the substrate loading hand may not have a finger. That is, the substrate loading hand may not have a fork shape.
なお、図37(a)に示すように、基板搬入ハンド161Lの板部263の上面を湾曲させてもよい。このように、板部263の上面(ホルダ基板保持面)を湾曲させることで、基板の断面係数を大きくすることができる。すなわち、基板の撓みに対して、基板の厚みが実際よりも数倍から数百倍大きくなったのと同じ効果を得ることができる。
As shown in FIG. 37A, the upper surface of the plate portion 263 of the substrate loading hand 161L may be curved. By curving the upper surface (the holder substrate holding surface) of the plate portion 263 as described above, the section coefficient of the substrate can be increased. That is, the same effect can be obtained as the thickness of the substrate becomes several to several hundreds times larger than the actual thickness with respect to the deflection of the substrate.
このようにすることで、図37(b)のように-X端部が飛び出した状態で基板Pを基板搬入ハンド161L上に載置しても、基板Pの-X端部に撓み(垂れ)が発生するのを抑制することができる。また、基板Pの撓み(垂れ)の発生が抑制されているため、基板Pを基板ホルダに接触させるときに、基板Pを-X側の辺のY軸方向中央部から接触させることができるので、基板Pの-X端部に皺を生じにくくさせることができる。
By doing this, as shown in FIG. 37B, even if the substrate P is placed on the substrate carry-in hand 161L in a state where the -X end protrudes, it bends (drops) at the -X end of the substrate P. Can be suppressed. In addition, since generation of bending (drooping) of the substrate P is suppressed, the substrate P can be brought into contact from the central portion in the Y-axis direction of the side on the −X side when the substrate P is brought into contact with the substrate holder. This makes it possible to make wrinkles less likely to occur at the -X end of the substrate P.
また、図38に示すように、基板搬送部160A~160Lはカバー199が設けられていてもよい。カバー199を設けることにより、基板Pへのゴミの付着を防止することができるとともに、基板Pの温度を一定にすることができる。
Further, as shown in FIG. 38, the substrate transport units 160A to 160L may be provided with a cover 199. By providing the cover 199, adhesion of dust to the substrate P can be prevented, and the temperature of the substrate P can be made constant.
なお、上記第2実施形態及びその変形例において、ステージ装置20Gに代えて、第1実施形態に係るステージ装置20Aを用いてもよい。また、ステージ装置20Gを第1実施形態およびその変形例に適用してもよい。
In the second embodiment and the modification thereof, the stage device 20A according to the first embodiment may be used instead of the stage device 20G. Further, the stage device 20G may be applied to the first embodiment and its modification.
また、第1及び第2実施形態並びにその変形例において、図39に示すように、投影光学系16やマスクステージ14等を支持する、上コラムと呼ばれる定盤30の、+X側端部付近を、基板搬入ハンドと干渉しないように一部面取り(30a)してもよい。なお、図39では基板搬入ハンドが第2実施形態に係る基板搬入ハンド161Gの場合を示している。これにより、露光装置全体の高さを低減することができる。
In the first and second embodiments and their modifications, as shown in FIG. 39, the vicinity of the + X side end portion of the surface plate 30 called the upper column, which supports the projection optical system 16 and the mask stage 14 etc. And (c) partially chamfering (30a) so as not to interfere with the substrate loading hand. FIG. 39 shows the case in which the substrate loading hand is the substrate loading hand 161G according to the second embodiment. Thereby, the height of the entire exposure apparatus can be reduced.
また、上記第1及び第2実施形態並びにその変形例において、先述の基板位置計測装置として、ステージ装置20A,20Gは、図40(a)及び図40(b)に示すように、基板Pのエッジを検出するためのCCDカメラ31x及び31y(画像処理エッジ検出)を備えている。CCDカメラ31xは基板ホルダ28A,28Gに載置される前の基板Pの-X側の辺2箇所を観察できるように配置されている。CCDカメラ31yは、基板Pの-Y側(又は+Y側)の辺の1箇所を下から観察できるように配置されている。これにより、ステージ装置20A,20Gに対する基板PのX位置、Y位置、θz位置を知ることができる。これらの情報は、載置前の基板P2の位置の修正や、載置後の基板P2の位置情報としてステージ制御に用いられる。なお、基板Pのエッジは検出するCCDカメラ31x及び31yでなく、たとえば、光源と、受光部とを備えた公知のエッジセンサを用いるようにしてもよい。光源は、CCDカメラ31x及び31yと同じ位置に配置され、受光部は、基板Pを挟んで光源に対向するように配置される。光源から照射される計測光の光軸に直交する断面はライン状であり、受光部は、該計測光を受光することにより基板Pの端部を検出する。このようにして、基板PのX軸方向の端部とY軸方向の端部とを計測した検出結果に基づいて、ステージ装置20A,20Gに対する基板PのX位置、Y位置、θz位置を検出するようにしてもよい。
In the first and second embodiments and their modifications, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the stage devices 20A and 20G are the substrate position measuring devices as the substrate position measuring device described above. The CCD cameras 31x and 31y (image processing edge detection) for detecting an edge are provided. The CCD cameras 31x are arranged so that two sides on the -X side of the substrate P before being placed on the substrate holders 28A and 28G can be observed. The CCD camera 31y is arranged such that one of the sides on the −Y side (or the + Y side) of the substrate P can be observed from below. Thereby, the X position, the Y position, and the θz position of the substrate P relative to the stage devices 20A and 20G can be known. These pieces of information are used for stage control, as correction of the position of the substrate P2 before placement and as position information of the substrate P2 after placement. The edge of the substrate P may not be detected by the CCD cameras 31x and 31y. For example, a known edge sensor including a light source and a light receiving unit may be used. The light source is disposed at the same position as the CCD cameras 31x and 31y, and the light receiving unit is disposed so as to face the light source with the substrate P interposed therebetween. The cross section orthogonal to the optical axis of the measurement light emitted from the light source is linear, and the light receiving unit detects the end of the substrate P by receiving the measurement light. Thus, based on the detection result obtained by measuring the end in the X-axis direction and the end in the Y-axis direction of the substrate P, the X position, Y position, and θz position of the substrate P with respect to the stage devices 20A and 20G are detected You may do it.
また、上記第1及び第2実施形態並びにその変形例において、図41(a)~図41(c)に示すステージ装置20Mを用いてもよい。
Further, in the first and second embodiments and their modifications, the stage device 20M shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c) may be used.
ステージ装置20Mにおいて、図41(a)に示すように、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Mは基板ホルダ28Mの-X側端部に2箇所設けられている。基板搬入ベアラ装置182Mは、図41(b)に示すように、基板ホルダ28Mの-X側端部に形成された切り欠き28aにその一部が収納された状態において、保持パッド184aの上面の高さが、基板ホルダ28Mの上面とほぼ同一の高さとなるように設定されている。このため、基板P2の載置後にも、保持パッド184aは-X方向へ移動して基板ホルダ28Mから退避しなくてよい。
In the stage device 20M, as shown in FIG. 41A, the substrate loading bearer device 182M is provided in two places at the -X side end of the substrate holder 28M. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the substrate loading bearer device 182M has a part on the notch 28a formed at the end of the substrate holder 28M on the -X side. The height is set to be substantially the same height as the upper surface of the substrate holder 28M. Therefore, even after the substrate P2 is placed, the holding pad 184a does not have to move in the −X direction and be retracted from the substrate holder 28M.
また、図41(c)に示すように、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Mは斜めに搬入される基板P2の裏面を確実に吸着固定できるように傾斜できるようになっている。また、基板搬入ベアラ装置182Mは、基板ホルダ28Mに対する基板P2の相対位置調整(アライメント)ができるように水平方向(X軸方向又はX軸及びY軸方向)に移動できるようになっている。
Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the substrate carry-in bearer device 182M can be inclined so that the back surface of the substrate P2 carried in obliquely can be suctioned and fixed with certainty. Further, the substrate loading bearer device 182M can move in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction or the X-axis and Y-axis directions) so that relative position adjustment (alignment) of the substrate P2 with respect to the substrate holder 28M can be performed.
ステージ装置20Mによれば、保持パッド184aを傾斜させることができるため、基板P2の裏面を確実に吸着固定できる。
According to the stage device 20M, since the holding pad 184a can be inclined, the back surface of the substrate P2 can be reliably suctioned and fixed.
また、上記第1及び第2実施形態並びにその変形例において、図42(a)及び図42(b)に示すステージ装置20Nを用いてもよい。
Further, in the first and second embodiments and their modifications, the stage device 20N shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) may be used.
ステージ装置20Nは、独立して移動する、第1及び第2実施形態で説明した基板搬入ベアラ装置を持たない。ステージ装置20Nにおいては、基板ホルダ28Nの上面の一部が搬入基板の先端部を吸着把持する保持パッド184aの役目を兼ねるよう、基板ホルダの-X側端面付近の1箇所又は複数個所に搬入基板の先端部を吸着把持するための吸着領域(ベアラ領域)187が設けられている。
The stage device 20N does not have the substrate loading bearer device which moves independently and which is described in the first and second embodiments. In the stage device 20N, the substrate is carried in at one or more locations near the -X side end face of the substrate holder so that a part of the upper surface of the substrate holder 28N also serves as a holding pad 184a that suctions and holds the leading end of the carried-in substrate. An adsorption area (bearer area) 187 is provided for adsorbing and holding the tip of the head.
なお、ステージ装置20Nは、独立移動する基板搬入ベアラ装置を持たないため、基板搬入ベアラ装置によって搬入基板Pの基板ホルダ28Nに対する相対位置調整(アライメント)を行うことができないが、例えば、ベアラ領域187で基板を吸着する前に、一対の基板搬出ハンドを用いて、基板搬入ハンド上で基板Pの位置調整を行えばよい。また、基板Pを基板ホルダ28Nに載置したのち、基板ホルダ28Nに対する基板Pの相対位置調整(アライメント)を行ないたい場合には、基板搬出ベアラ装置183Aを使って行えばよい。
In addition, since the stage device 20N does not have the substrate loading bearer device moving independently, the relative position adjustment (alignment) of the loaded substrate P with respect to the substrate holder 28N can not be performed by the substrate loading bearer device. The position adjustment of the substrate P may be performed on the substrate carry-in hand using the pair of substrate carry-out hands before suctioning the substrate at step S2. If it is desired to perform relative position adjustment (alignment) of the substrate P with respect to the substrate holder 28N after placing the substrate P on the substrate holder 28N, the substrate carry-out bearer device 183A may be used.
また、ステージ装置が独立移動する基板搬入ベアラ装置を持たない場合、図43(a)~図43(c)に示すように、例えば基板搬入ハンド161Aを基板Pと基板ホルダ28Nとの間から退避させつつ、基板ホルダ28N上に基板P2を載置する場合、基板ホルダ28Nは、空気を吸い込むことにより、基板P2をホルダ基板保持面に吸着することで、安定して基板P2の搬入を行うことができる。
In addition, when the stage device does not have a substrate loading bearer device which moves independently, as shown in FIGS. 43A to 43C, for example, the substrate loading hand 161A is retracted from between the substrate P and the substrate holder 28N. In the case where the substrate P2 is placed on the substrate holder 28N, the substrate holder 28N absorbs the air to suck the substrate P2 onto the holder substrate holding surface, thereby stably carrying in the substrate P2. Can.
なお、上記第1及び第2実施形態並びにその変形例において、基板搬入ハンドの指部上の支持パッドは省略してもよい。
In the first and second embodiments and their modifications, the support pad on the finger of the substrate loading hand may be omitted.
また、上記各実施形態では、投影光学系16として、等倍系が用いられたが、これに限られず、縮小系、あるいは拡大系を用いても良い。
In each of the above-described embodiments, the same magnification system is used as the projection optical system 16. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
露光装置の用途としては、角型のガラスプレートに液晶表示素子パターンを転写する液晶用の露光装置に限定されることなく、例えば有機EL(Electro―Luminescence)パネル製造用の露光装置、半導体製造用の露光装置、薄膜磁気ヘッド、マイクロマシン及びDNAチップなどを製造するための露光装置にも広く適用できる。また、半導体素子などのマイクロデバイスだけでなく、光露光装置、EUV露光装置、X線露光装置、及び電子線露光装置などで使用されるマスク又はレチクルを製造するために、ガラス基板又はシリコンウエハなどに回路パターンを転写する露光装置にも適用できる。
The application of the exposure apparatus is not limited to an exposure apparatus for liquid crystal that transfers a liquid crystal display element pattern to a square glass plate, and for example, an exposure apparatus for manufacturing an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) panel, for semiconductor manufacturing The present invention can be widely applied to an exposure apparatus for producing an exposure apparatus, a thin film magnetic head, a micromachine, a DNA chip, etc. In addition, in order to manufacture not only micro devices such as semiconductor devices but also masks or reticles used in light exposure devices, EUV exposure devices, X-ray exposure devices, electron beam exposure devices, etc., glass substrates or silicon wafers etc. Can also be applied to an exposure apparatus for transferring a circuit pattern to
また、露光対象となる基板はガラスプレートに限られず、例えばウエハ、セラミック基板、フィルム部材、あるいはマスクブランクスなど、他の物体でも良い。また、露光対象物がフラットパネルディスプレイ用の基板である場合、その基板の厚さは特に限定されず、例えばフィルム状(可撓性を有するシート状の部材)のものも含まれる。なお、本実施形態の露光装置は、一辺の長さ、又は対角長が500mm以上の基板が露光対象物である場合に特に有効である。また、露光対象の基板が可撓性を有するシート状である場合には、該シートがロール状に形成されていても良い。
Further, the substrate to be exposed is not limited to the glass plate, but may be another object such as a wafer, a ceramic substrate, a film member, or a mask blank. When the exposure target is a substrate for a flat panel display, the thickness of the substrate is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, a film (a sheet-like member having flexibility). Note that the exposure apparatus of the present embodiment is particularly effective when a substrate having a side length or a diagonal length of 500 mm or more is an exposure target. When the substrate to be exposed is in the form of a flexible sheet, the sheet may be formed in a roll.
《デバイス製造方法》
次に、上記各実施形態に係る露光装置10A~10Lをリソグラフィ工程で使用したマイクロデバイスの製造方法について説明する。上記実施形態の露光装置10A~10Lでは、基板上に所定のパターン(回路パターン、電極パターン等)を形成することによって、マイクロデバイスとしての液晶表示素子を得ることができる。
〈パターン形成工程〉
まず、上述した各実施形態に係る露光装置を用いて、パターン像を感光性基板(レジストが塗布されたガラス基板等)に形成する、いわゆる光リソグラフィ工程が実行される。この光リソグラフィ工程によって、感光性基板上には多数の電極等を含む所定パターンが形成される。その後、露光された基板は、現像工程、エッチング工程、レジスト剥離工程等の各工程を経ることによって、基板上に所定のパターンが形成される。
〈カラーフィルタ形成工程〉
次に、R(Red)、G(Green)、B(Blue)に対応した3つのドットの組がマトリックス状に多数配列された、又はR、G、Bの3本のストライプのフィルタの組を複数水平走査線方向に配列したカラーフィルタを形成する。
〈セル組み立て工程〉
次に、パターン形成工程にて得られた所定パターンを有する基板、及びカラーフィルタ形成工程にて得られたカラーフィルタ等を用いて液晶パネル(液晶セル)を組み立てる。例えば、パターン形成工程にて得られた所定パターンを有する基板とカラーフィルタ形成工程にて得られたカラーフィルタとの間に液晶を注入して、液晶パネル(液晶セル)を製造する。
〈モジュール組立工程〉
その後、組み立てられた液晶パネル(液晶セル)の表示動作を行わせる電気回路、バックライト等の各部品を取り付けて液晶表示素子として完成させる。 << Device manufacturing method >>
Next, a method of manufacturing a microdevice using theexposure apparatuses 10A to 10L according to the above-described embodiments in the lithography process will be described. In the exposure apparatuses 10A to 10L according to the above-described embodiment, liquid crystal display elements as microdevices can be obtained by forming predetermined patterns (circuit patterns, electrode patterns, etc.) on a substrate.
<Pattern formation process>
First, a so-called photolithographic process of forming a pattern image on a photosensitive substrate (such as a glass substrate coated with a resist) is performed using the exposure apparatus according to each of the above-described embodiments. By this photolithography process, a predetermined pattern including a large number of electrodes and the like is formed on the photosensitive substrate. Thereafter, the exposed substrate is subjected to steps such as a developing step, an etching step and a resist removing step to form a predetermined pattern on the substrate.
<Color filter formation process>
Next, a set of three stripes corresponding to R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue) are arranged in a large number in a matrix, or a set of three stripe filters of R, G, B Form color filters arranged in the direction of a plurality of horizontal scanning lines.
<Cell assembly process>
Next, a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell) is assembled using the substrate having the predetermined pattern obtained in the pattern forming step, the color filter obtained in the color filter forming step, and the like. For example, a liquid crystal is injected between a substrate having a predetermined pattern obtained in the pattern formation step and a color filter obtained in the color filter formation step to manufacture a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell).
<Module assembly process>
Thereafter, components such as an electric circuit for performing a display operation of the assembled liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell) and a backlight are attached to complete the liquid crystal display element.
次に、上記各実施形態に係る露光装置10A~10Lをリソグラフィ工程で使用したマイクロデバイスの製造方法について説明する。上記実施形態の露光装置10A~10Lでは、基板上に所定のパターン(回路パターン、電極パターン等)を形成することによって、マイクロデバイスとしての液晶表示素子を得ることができる。
〈パターン形成工程〉
まず、上述した各実施形態に係る露光装置を用いて、パターン像を感光性基板(レジストが塗布されたガラス基板等)に形成する、いわゆる光リソグラフィ工程が実行される。この光リソグラフィ工程によって、感光性基板上には多数の電極等を含む所定パターンが形成される。その後、露光された基板は、現像工程、エッチング工程、レジスト剥離工程等の各工程を経ることによって、基板上に所定のパターンが形成される。
〈カラーフィルタ形成工程〉
次に、R(Red)、G(Green)、B(Blue)に対応した3つのドットの組がマトリックス状に多数配列された、又はR、G、Bの3本のストライプのフィルタの組を複数水平走査線方向に配列したカラーフィルタを形成する。
〈セル組み立て工程〉
次に、パターン形成工程にて得られた所定パターンを有する基板、及びカラーフィルタ形成工程にて得られたカラーフィルタ等を用いて液晶パネル(液晶セル)を組み立てる。例えば、パターン形成工程にて得られた所定パターンを有する基板とカラーフィルタ形成工程にて得られたカラーフィルタとの間に液晶を注入して、液晶パネル(液晶セル)を製造する。
〈モジュール組立工程〉
その後、組み立てられた液晶パネル(液晶セル)の表示動作を行わせる電気回路、バックライト等の各部品を取り付けて液晶表示素子として完成させる。 << Device manufacturing method >>
Next, a method of manufacturing a microdevice using the
<Pattern formation process>
First, a so-called photolithographic process of forming a pattern image on a photosensitive substrate (such as a glass substrate coated with a resist) is performed using the exposure apparatus according to each of the above-described embodiments. By this photolithography process, a predetermined pattern including a large number of electrodes and the like is formed on the photosensitive substrate. Thereafter, the exposed substrate is subjected to steps such as a developing step, an etching step and a resist removing step to form a predetermined pattern on the substrate.
<Color filter formation process>
Next, a set of three stripes corresponding to R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue) are arranged in a large number in a matrix, or a set of three stripe filters of R, G, B Form color filters arranged in the direction of a plurality of horizontal scanning lines.
<Cell assembly process>
Next, a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell) is assembled using the substrate having the predetermined pattern obtained in the pattern forming step, the color filter obtained in the color filter forming step, and the like. For example, a liquid crystal is injected between a substrate having a predetermined pattern obtained in the pattern formation step and a color filter obtained in the color filter formation step to manufacture a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell).
<Module assembly process>
Thereafter, components such as an electric circuit for performing a display operation of the assembled liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell) and a backlight are attached to complete the liquid crystal display element.
この場合、パターン形成工程において、上記各実施形態に係る露光装置を用いて高スループットかつ高精度で基板の露光が行われるので、結果的に、液晶表示素子の生産性を向上させることができる。
In this case, in the pattern formation step, the exposure of the substrate is performed with high throughput and high accuracy using the exposure apparatus according to each of the above-described embodiments. As a result, the productivity of the liquid crystal display element can be improved.
上述した実施形態は本発明の好適な実施の例である。但し、これに限定されるものではなく、本発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲内において種々変形実施可能である。
The embodiments described above are examples of preferred implementations of the invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.
10A~10L 露光装置
20A,20G,20M,20N ステージ装置
28A,28G,28M,28N 基板ホルダ
100A~100L 基板搬送装置
160A~160L 基板搬送部
161A~161L 基板搬入ハンド
164 X軸駆動装置
182A,182G,182M 基板搬入ベアラ装置
184a 保持パッド
P,P1,P2,P3 基板
10A to 10L Exposure apparatus 20A, 20G, 20M, 20N Stage device 28A, 28G, 28M, 28N Substrate holder 100A to 100L Substrate transfer device 160A to 160L Substrate transfer part 161A to 161L Substrate loading hand 164 X axis drive device 182A, 182G, 182M Substrate Loading Bearer Device 184a Holding Pad P, P1, P2, P3 Substrate
20A,20G,20M,20N ステージ装置
28A,28G,28M,28N 基板ホルダ
100A~100L 基板搬送装置
160A~160L 基板搬送部
161A~161L 基板搬入ハンド
164 X軸駆動装置
182A,182G,182M 基板搬入ベアラ装置
184a 保持パッド
P,P1,P2,P3 基板
10A to 10L
Claims (33)
- 基板を保持装置の保持面に搬送する基板搬送装置において、
前記保持装置の上方で前記基板を保持する第1保持部と、
前記第1保持部に保持された前記基板の一部を保持する第2保持部と、
前記第1保持部が前記保持装置の上方から退避されるように、前記保持装置及び前記第2保持部と前記第1保持部とを、前記保持面に沿う所定方向へ相対移動させる駆動部と、を備え、
前記第1保持部は、前記駆動部による相対移動中に、前記基板のうち前記第1保持部に保持された領域の上下方向の位置が前記保持装置に近づくよう、前記基板を保持する基板搬送装置。 A substrate transfer apparatus for transferring a substrate to a holding surface of a holding apparatus
A first holding unit that holds the substrate above the holding device;
A second holding unit that holds a part of the substrate held by the first holding unit;
A driving unit for relatively moving the holding device, the second holding unit, and the first holding unit in a predetermined direction along the holding surface such that the first holding unit is retracted from above the holding device; , And
The first holding unit holds the substrate such that the vertical position of the region of the substrate held by the first holding unit approaches the holding device during relative movement by the drive unit. apparatus. - 前記第1保持部は、前記基板の前記一部と前記保持面との距離が前記基板の前記他部と前記保持面との距離よりも短い状態の前記基板を保持する請求項1に記載の基板搬送装置。 The first holding unit holds the substrate in a state in which the distance between the part of the substrate and the holding surface is shorter than the distance between the other part of the substrate and the holding surface. Substrate transfer device.
- 前記駆動部は、前記第2保持部が前記基板の一部を搬送する前記保持装置の一端側から前記保持装置の他端側へ向かって、前記第1保持部を前記保持装置と前記第2保持部とに対して相対移動させる請求項1又は2に記載の基板搬送装置。 The driving unit moves the first holding unit to the holding unit and the second holding unit from the one end side of the holding unit in which the second holding unit conveys a part of the substrate to the other end side of the holding unit. The substrate transfer apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the substrate transfer device is moved relative to the holding unit.
- 前記駆動部は、前記保持装置の上方で、前記第1保持部を前記保持装置に対して相対移動させる請求項1から3の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送装置。 The substrate transport apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the drive unit moves the first holding unit relative to the holding device above the holding device.
- 前記駆動部は、前記第2保持部が前記基板の一部を保持した状態で、前記第1保持部を前記保持装置の上方から退避するよう、前記上下方向に関して前記保持装置と重ならない位置へ移動させる請求項4に記載の基板搬送装置。 The driving unit is positioned so as not to overlap the holding device in the vertical direction so that the first holding unit is retracted from above the holding device in a state where the second holding unit holds a part of the substrate. The substrate transfer apparatus according to claim 4, which is moved.
- 前記保持装置は、前記駆動部による相対移動により、前記第1保持部の保持が解除された前記基板の領域を保持する請求項4又は5に記載の基板搬送装置。 The substrate transfer apparatus according to claim 4, wherein the holding device holds the area of the substrate whose holding of the first holding unit is released by relative movement by the driving unit.
- 前記第1保持部は、前記駆動部による相対移動中に、前記基板のうち前記第1保持部に保持された領域の前記所定方向の位置が変化する前記基板を保持する請求項4から6の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送装置。 The first holding unit holds the substrate in which the position in the predetermined direction of the region held by the first holding unit in the substrate changes during relative movement by the drive unit. The substrate transfer apparatus according to any one of the above.
- 前記第2保持部は、前記保持装置に設けられる請求項1から7の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送装置。 The substrate transfer apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the second holding unit is provided in the holding device.
- 前記第2保持部は、前記保持面に設けられる請求項8に記載の基板搬送装置。 The substrate transfer apparatus according to claim 8, wherein the second holding unit is provided on the holding surface.
- 前記第2保持部は、前記基板の一部を保持した状態で、前記保持装置に対する前記基板の位置を調整する請求項1から9の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送装置。 The substrate transport apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the second holding unit adjusts the position of the substrate with respect to the holding device while holding a part of the substrate.
- 前記基板とは異なる別の基板を、前記保持装置から搬出する搬出装置を備え、
前記搬出装置は、前記駆動部による前記保持装置及び前記第2保持部と前記第1保持部と前記保持装置及び前記第2保持部との相対移動中に、前記別の基板を搬出する請求項1から10の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送装置。 The substrate processing apparatus further comprises an unloading device for unloading another substrate different from the substrate from the holding device,
The carrying-out device carries out the other substrate during relative movement of the holding device and the second holding unit, the first holding unit, and the holding device and the second holding unit by the driving unit. The substrate transfer apparatus according to any one of 1 to 10. - 前記搬出装置は、上下方向に関して前記第1保持部と前記保持装置との間の位置で前記別の基板を移動させる請求項11に記載の基板搬送装置。 The substrate transport apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the carry-out apparatus moves the another substrate at a position between the first holding unit and the holding apparatus in the vertical direction.
- 前記搬出装置は、前記第1保持部に設けられ、
前記駆動部は、前記第1保持部を前記第2保持部と前記保持装置とに対して相対移動させるとともに、前記搬出装置を移動させる請求項11又は12に記載の基板搬送装置。 The unloading device is provided in the first holding unit,
The substrate transport apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the drive unit moves the first holding unit relative to the second holding unit and the holding device, and moves the unloading device. - 前記保持装置は、前記別の基板を浮上させる気体を供給する吸気孔を有し、
前記搬出装置は、前記保持装置上で浮上された前記別の基板を前記保持装置の保持面に沿って移動させる請求項11から13の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送装置。 The holding device has an air inlet for supplying a gas for floating the other substrate,
The substrate transport apparatus according to any one of claims 11 to 13, wherein the carry-out apparatus moves the another substrate floated on the holding apparatus along the holding surface of the holding apparatus. - 請求項1~14の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送装置と、
前記保持装置へ搬送された前記基板に対してエネルギビームを照射し、前記基板を露光する光学系と、を備える露光装置。 The substrate transfer apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
An optical system which irradiates an energy beam to the substrate transported to the holding device and exposes the substrate. - 前記基板は、少なくとも一辺の長さ、または対角長が500mm以上であり、フラットパネルディスプレイ用である請求項15に記載の露光装置。 The exposure apparatus according to claim 15, wherein the substrate has a length of at least one side or a diagonal length of 500 mm or more and is for a flat panel display.
- 請求項16に記載の露光装置を用いて基板を露光することと、
前記露光された前記基板を現像することと、を含むフラットパネルディスプレイ製造方法。 Exposing the substrate using the exposure apparatus according to claim 16;
Developing the exposed substrate. - 請求項15又は16に記載の露光装置を用いて基板を露光することと、
前記露光された前記基板を現像することと、を含むデバイス製造方法。 Exposing the substrate using the exposure apparatus according to claim 15 or 16;
Developing the exposed substrate. - 基板を保持装置の保持面に搬送する基板搬送方法において、
前記保持装置の上方で第1保持部と第2保持部とにより基板を保持することと、
前記第1保持部が前記保持装置の上方から退避されるように、前記保持装置及び前記第2保持部と前記第1保持部とを、前記保持面に沿う所定方向へ相対移動させることと、を含み、
前記保持することでは、相対移動中に、前記基板のうち前記第1保持部に保持された領域の上下方向の位置が前記保持装置に近づくよう、前記第1保持部が前記基板を保持する基板搬送方法。 In a substrate transfer method for transferring a substrate to a holding surface of a holding device,
Holding the substrate by the first holding portion and the second holding portion above the holding device;
Relatively moving the holding device, the second holding portion, and the first holding portion in a predetermined direction along the holding surface such that the first holding portion is retracted from above the holding device; Including
In the holding, the substrate on which the first holding unit holds the substrate so that the vertical position of the region of the substrate held by the first holding unit approaches the holding device during relative movement. Transport method. - 前記保持することでは、前記基板の前記一部と前記保持面との距離が前記基板の前記他部と前記保持面との距離よりも短い状態の前記基板を前記第1保持部に保持させる請求項19に記載の基板搬送方法。 In the holding, the first holding portion holds the substrate in a state in which the distance between the portion of the substrate and the holding surface is shorter than the distance between the other portion of the substrate and the holding surface. Item 19. The substrate transfer method according to item 19.
- 前記相対移動させることでは、前記第2保持部が前記基板の一部を搬送する前記保持装置の一端側から前記保持装置の他端側へ向かって、前記第1保持部を前記保持装置と前記第2保持部とに対して相対移動させる請求項19又は20に記載の基板搬送方法。 In the relative movement, the second holding unit conveys a part of the substrate from one end side of the holding unit to the other end side of the holding unit, and the first holding unit is the holding unit and the holding unit. The substrate transfer method according to claim 19, wherein the substrate transfer method is moved relative to the second holding unit.
- 前記相対移動させることでは、前記保持装置の上方で、前記第1保持部を前記保持装置に対して相対移動させる請求項19から21の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送方法。 The substrate transfer method according to any one of claims 19 to 21, wherein in the relative movement, the first holding portion is moved relative to the holding device above the holding device.
- 前記相対移動させることでは、前記第2保持部が前記基板の一部を保持した状態で、前記第1保持部を前記保持装置の上方から退避するよう、前記上下方向に関して前記保持装置と重ならない位置へ移動させる請求項22に記載の基板搬送方法。 In the relative movement, it does not overlap with the holding device in the vertical direction so that the first holding portion is retracted from above the holding device while the second holding portion holds a part of the substrate. The method for transferring a substrate according to claim 22, wherein the substrate is moved to a position.
- 前記保持することでは、相対移動により、前記第1保持部の保持が解除された前記基板の領域を前記保持部に保持させる請求項22又は23に記載の基板搬送方法。 The substrate transfer method according to claim 22 or 23, wherein in the holding, the area of the substrate whose holding of the first holding unit has been released is held by the holding unit by relative movement.
- 前記保持することでは、相対移動中に、前記基板のうち前記第1保持部に保持された領域の前記所定方向の位置が変化するよう前記第1保持部により前記基板を保持させる請求項22から24の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送方法。 The holding of the substrate is performed by the first holding unit such that the position in the predetermined direction of the region of the substrate held by the first holding unit is changed during the relative movement. 24. The substrate transfer method according to any one of 24.
- 前記第2保持部が前記基板の一部を保持した状態で、前記保持装置に対する前記基板の位置を調整することを含む請求項19から請求項25の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送方法。 The substrate transfer method according to any one of claims 19 to 25, further comprising adjusting the position of the substrate with respect to the holding device in a state where the second holding portion holds a part of the substrate.
- 前記基板とは異なる別の基板を、前記保持装置から搬出することを含み、
前記搬出することでは、前記保持装置及び前記第2保持部と前記第1保持部との相対移動中に、前記別の基板を搬出する請求項19から26の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送方法。 Carrying out another substrate different from the substrate from the holding device;
27. The substrate conveyance method according to any one of claims 19 to 26, wherein in the carrying out, the other substrate is carried out during relative movement between the holding device and the second holding unit and the first holding unit. Method. - 前記搬出することでは、上下方向に関して前記第1保持部と前記保持装置との間の位置で前記別の基板を移動させる請求項27に記載の基板搬送方法。 28. The substrate transfer method according to claim 27, wherein in the unloading, the other substrate is moved at a position between the first holding unit and the holding device in the vertical direction.
- 前記相対移動させることでは、前記第1保持部を前記第2保持部と前記保持装置とに対して相対移動させるとともに、前記別の基板を搬出する請求項27又は28に記載の基板搬送方法。 29. The substrate transfer method according to claim 27, wherein in the relative movement, the first holding unit is moved relative to the second holding unit and the holding device, and the other substrate is unloaded.
- 前記搬出することでは、前記保持装置上で浮上された前記別の基板を前記保持装置の保持面に沿って移動させる請求項27から29の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送方法。 30. The substrate transfer method according to any one of claims 27 to 29, wherein in the unloading, the another substrate floated on the holding device is moved along the holding surface of the holding device.
- 請求項19から30の何れか一項に記載の基板搬送方法により、前記基板を前記保持装置へ搬送することと、
前記基板に対してエネルギビームを照射し、前記基板を露光することと、を含む露光方法。 Transfer the substrate to the holding device by the substrate transfer method according to any one of claims 19 to 30;
Irradiating the substrate with an energy beam to expose the substrate. - 請求項30に記載の露光方法を用いて前記基板を露光することと、
前記露光された前記基板を現像することと、を含むフラットパネルディスプレイ製造方法。 Exposing the substrate using the exposure method according to claim 30;
Developing the exposed substrate. - 請求項31に記載の露光方法を用いて前記基板を露光することと、
前記露光された前記基板を現像することと、を含むデバイス製造方法。 Exposing the substrate using the exposure method according to claim 31;
Developing the exposed substrate.
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2017/035710 WO2019064577A1 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2017-09-29 | Substrate handling device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, device production method, substrate handling method, and exposure method |
CN201780095324.XA CN111164513B (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2017-09-29 | Substrate carrying apparatus, exposure apparatus, substrate carrying method, exposure method, flat panel display, and device manufacturing method |
TW107132021A TWI707817B (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2018-09-12 | Substrate conveying device, exposure device, flat panel display manufacturing method, component manufacturing method, substrate conveying method, and exposure method |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2017/035710 WO2019064577A1 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2017-09-29 | Substrate handling device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, device production method, substrate handling method, and exposure method |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2019064577A1 true WO2019064577A1 (en) | 2019-04-04 |
Family
ID=65901145
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2017/035710 WO2019064577A1 (en) | 2017-09-29 | 2017-09-29 | Substrate handling device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, device production method, substrate handling method, and exposure method |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN111164513B (en) |
TW (1) | TWI707817B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2019064577A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
TWI754333B (en) * | 2019-08-20 | 2022-02-01 | 荷蘭商Asml荷蘭公司 | Substrate holder, lithographic apparatus and method |
Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2010123888A (en) * | 2008-11-21 | 2010-06-03 | Nikon Corp | Conveying device, conveying method, exposing device, and method for manufacturing device |
JP2011014784A (en) * | 2009-07-03 | 2011-01-20 | Nikon Corp | Substrate holding member, device and method for transporting substrate, stage device, exposure device, and device manufacturing method |
JP2012238758A (en) * | 2011-05-12 | 2012-12-06 | Sharp Corp | Substrate loading apparatus and substrate loading method |
WO2013031222A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-03-07 | 株式会社ニコン | Object transportation device, object processing device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, method for producing device, method for transporting object, and method for exchanging object |
JP2016053732A (en) * | 2011-05-13 | 2016-04-14 | 株式会社ニコン | Exposure device, producing method for flat panel display and device producing method |
JP2016157133A (en) * | 2010-02-17 | 2016-09-01 | 株式会社ニコン | Transport device, transport method, exposure apparatus, and device production method |
WO2016159062A1 (en) * | 2015-03-30 | 2016-10-06 | 株式会社ニコン | Object conveyance apparatus, exposure apparatus, flat panel display production method, device production method, object conveyance method, and exposure method |
Family Cites Families (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
AU2186099A (en) * | 1998-02-09 | 1999-08-23 | Nikon Corporation | Apparatus for supporting base plate, apparatus and method for transferring base plate, method of replacing base plate, and exposure apparatus and method of manufacturing the same |
US6213704B1 (en) * | 1998-05-20 | 2001-04-10 | Applied Komatsu Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for substrate transfer and processing |
JP2010052844A (en) * | 2008-08-26 | 2010-03-11 | Dainippon Screen Mfg Co Ltd | Substrate conveyance method, posture change device, and substrate conveyance device |
US8970820B2 (en) * | 2009-05-20 | 2015-03-03 | Nikon Corporation | Object exchange method, exposure method, carrier system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method |
JP5310512B2 (en) * | 2009-12-02 | 2013-10-09 | 東京エレクトロン株式会社 | Substrate processing equipment |
US20120064461A1 (en) * | 2010-09-13 | 2012-03-15 | Nikon Corporation | Movable body apparatus, exposure apparatus, device manufacturing method, flat-panel display manufacturing method, and object exchange method |
KR102193251B1 (en) * | 2011-05-13 | 2020-12-22 | 가부시키가이샤 니콘 | Substrate-replacement device |
CN103579059B (en) * | 2012-08-03 | 2016-06-01 | 上海微电子装备有限公司 | Substrate machine platform dedicated substrate upper slice system and upper slice method thereof |
-
2017
- 2017-09-29 CN CN201780095324.XA patent/CN111164513B/en active Active
- 2017-09-29 WO PCT/JP2017/035710 patent/WO2019064577A1/en active Application Filing
-
2018
- 2018-09-12 TW TW107132021A patent/TWI707817B/en active
Patent Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2010123888A (en) * | 2008-11-21 | 2010-06-03 | Nikon Corp | Conveying device, conveying method, exposing device, and method for manufacturing device |
JP2011014784A (en) * | 2009-07-03 | 2011-01-20 | Nikon Corp | Substrate holding member, device and method for transporting substrate, stage device, exposure device, and device manufacturing method |
JP2016157133A (en) * | 2010-02-17 | 2016-09-01 | 株式会社ニコン | Transport device, transport method, exposure apparatus, and device production method |
JP2012238758A (en) * | 2011-05-12 | 2012-12-06 | Sharp Corp | Substrate loading apparatus and substrate loading method |
JP2016053732A (en) * | 2011-05-13 | 2016-04-14 | 株式会社ニコン | Exposure device, producing method for flat panel display and device producing method |
WO2013031222A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-03-07 | 株式会社ニコン | Object transportation device, object processing device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, method for producing device, method for transporting object, and method for exchanging object |
WO2016159062A1 (en) * | 2015-03-30 | 2016-10-06 | 株式会社ニコン | Object conveyance apparatus, exposure apparatus, flat panel display production method, device production method, object conveyance method, and exposure method |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
TWI754333B (en) * | 2019-08-20 | 2022-02-01 | 荷蘭商Asml荷蘭公司 | Substrate holder, lithographic apparatus and method |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
TWI707817B (en) | 2020-10-21 |
TW201919967A (en) | 2019-06-01 |
CN111164513A (en) | 2020-05-15 |
CN111164513B (en) | 2022-08-16 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
TWI735438B (en) | Object carrier device, exposure apparatus, manufacturing method of flat panel display, device manufacturing method, object carrying method, and exposure method | |
CN109791370B (en) | Exposure apparatus, method for manufacturing flat panel display, method for manufacturing device, and exposure method | |
CN110114725B (en) | Transfer apparatus, exposure apparatus, method for manufacturing flat panel display, and method for manufacturing device | |
JP6813098B2 (en) | Substrate transfer device, exposure device, flat panel display manufacturing method, device manufacturing method, substrate transfer method, and exposure method | |
WO2013150787A1 (en) | Object transfer system, exposure apparatus, method for manufacturing flat panel display, device manufacturing method, object holding apparatus, object transfer apparatus, object transfer method, and object replacing method | |
TWI707817B (en) | Substrate conveying device, exposure device, flat panel display manufacturing method, component manufacturing method, substrate conveying method, and exposure method | |
WO2019064576A1 (en) | Substrate handing device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, device production method, substrate handling method, and exposure method | |
JP7355174B2 (en) | Substrate transport device, exposure device, flat panel display manufacturing method, device manufacturing method, substrate transport method, and exposure method | |
WO2019064585A1 (en) | Substrate handling device, exposure device, method for producing flat panel display, device production method, substrate handling method, and exposure method | |
JP7287058B2 (en) | Substrate transport apparatus, exposure apparatus, flat panel display manufacturing method, device manufacturing method, and exposure method | |
JP7196734B2 (en) | Substrate transport apparatus, exposure apparatus, flat panel display manufacturing method, device manufacturing method, and exposure method | |
JP7207096B2 (en) | Substrate transport apparatus, exposure apparatus, flat panel display manufacturing method, device manufacturing method, and exposure method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 17927777 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 17927777 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: JP |